JP2020195896A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of fueling player's eagerness to play a game by enhancing the degree of attention to the game and the amusement of the game.SOLUTION: In the game machine, when a user selects a music, an MPU outputs the selected music from a speaker. In a case where an unselected music other than musics already selected by the user is selected (step S2901: Yes) and a probability variation promotion performance is to be executed (step S2903 or S2905: Yes), the MPU causes a symbol display part and the speaker to execute a music selection button performance which suggests or clearly indicates a game state (step S2909).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Generally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a musical piece selected by a player from a plurality of musical pieces may be output as an effect during a jackpot game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-49375

By the way, as a game machine, it is important to raise the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game to improve the motivation of the player to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game to improve the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is a music selection operation that suggests or clearly indicates the game state, provided that the player performs a determination operation on the operation means (21) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8, final effect 1 to 4) is executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game and improving the player's motivation to play the game.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of a game machine. A development view showing an example of the configuration of a game machine. A development view showing an example of the configuration of a game machine. The front view which shows an example of the game board of a game machine. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of a game machine. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of various tables used in a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process executed in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game times control processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed by a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed by a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination processing executed by a game machine. A table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command judgment processing executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of various tables used in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of various tables used in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game production determination process executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game production process executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of music selection image display processing executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection image display screen in the design display part of a game machine. The figure which shows the modification example of the tentative selection image in the music selection image. The figure which shows the modification example of the tentative selection image in the music selection image. The figure which shows another example of the provisional music selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the music selection counter data table used in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the selected music list table and the non-selected music list table used in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement order data table for a plurality of music used in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement of a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the initial music selection image display screen in the design display part of a game machine. The figure which shows another example of the initial arrangement of a music selection image. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the initial provisional music determination processing executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the tentative selection music lottery table used in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of initial provisional music output processing executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of music selection processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of provisionally selected music output processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of selected music output processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect processing executed on a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection button production table used in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R probability variation music selection button production lottery table used in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R probability variation music selection button production lottery table decision table used in a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing executed in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 16R probability variation music selection button production lottery table used in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R probability variation music selection button production lottery table decision table used in a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update processing executed in a game machine. The figure which shows an example of various tables used in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game setting process executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows the transition example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows the transition example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game start waiting process executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of top menu screen processing executed by the game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a game setting screen executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting item selection processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen processing executed by the game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a music list display setting screen executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a music selection button effect setting screen executed on a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting history selection processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen processing executed by the game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a music list display setting history screen executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a music selection button effect history screen executed on a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of provisionally selected music output processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of selected music output processing executed by a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of provisionally selected music output processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of selected music output processing executed by a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect processing executed on a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect processing executed on a game machine.

Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 74.

[Outline configuration of game machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the game machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the game machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 31 of the game machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in this embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of the game machine, but for example, a rotating body type game machine (slot machine), an arrange ball game machine, or a Jiyan ball game machine. The present invention can also be applied to the game machines of.

The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

[Structure of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like. ..

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is used to reflect the player's intention in the jackpot game production in the game rotation effect processing (step S1709 in FIG. 15) described later.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by the player of the touch key may be provided as an operation means. Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that the panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting the player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided as the operation means. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, in the game rotation effect processing (step S1709 of FIG. 15) described later, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the effect.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and in the music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23) and the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15) described later, the player presses the button. It is a push button to accept. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player in order to temporarily select a desired item from the options (items) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 described later in the music selection process and the game setting process. It includes an upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213 and a right selection button 214. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 includes operation switches 211a to 211d (see FIG. 5) for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to determine the tentatively selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes an operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the decision button 21B.

Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the decision button 21B, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by the player of the touch key is provided as an operation means. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, it is conceivable that a touch sensor for detecting the player's touch operation on the panel 25 and the panel 25 is provided as an operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214).

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 (see FIG. 3) of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launching mechanism 32 in an aligned state. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used for storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 (see FIG. 2) of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and include a game rotation effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15) and a jackpot game effect process (FIG. 15). 23), etc., the sound effect that outputs the sound is executed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect depending on a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking. The speaker 26 is an example of the audio output means of the present invention, and constitutes the effect means of the present invention.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the game machine 10, various commands (control signals) for instructing the control contents are transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating port 314, a second operating port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, and an out port 318. , A variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, and a main display unit 37 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321 and a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching the game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the description of FIG. 4, openings are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 to penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. Further, the through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hitting to the right, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of a game ball by another detection method.

Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b opens to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315, and the electric accessory 315b closes to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315. The sphere is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 316b allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening / closing door 316b closes the opening / closing door 316 to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. Door.

In the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 determines whether or not the jackpot is drawn. (Hereinafter, it may be called "big hit lottery"). Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result. Further, the jackpot lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls will be paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316. If so, the number of prize balls is 15. In particular, in the game machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game shifts to the special game state, and the variable winning opening 316 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 seconds). By repeating (for example, 5 times and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls are paid out, and the player is given a game value.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big hit lottery is executed. Then, when the result of the winning / failing determination is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game including an open / close execution mode in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened five times until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is in a state. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, which is more advantageous for the player than the 5R jackpot game state. It is a game state.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the game rotation effect display according to the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the upper operating port 314 or the lower operating port 315. Various displays are made. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the effect means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower portion of the symbol display unit 341, or at the left or right portion. The sub-display unit may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display unit 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub-display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the design display unit 341.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in each game time, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. To. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols fluctuate along the preset fluctuation direction (horizontal or vertical), and the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are stopped in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are lined up in the effective line is displayed and it is a jackpot. Is specified. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by the combination of the main symbols on the effective line, but it is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variation jackpot", for example, "777" symbol combinations set as symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols are lined up on the effective line. The state is displayed, or the state in which the same combination of symbols other than "777" is lined up in the valid line is displayed. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating 5R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, are lined up on the effective line. It is displayed, or a state in which the same combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot such as "777" and "333" is lined up in the effective line is displayed. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a combination of symbols indicating a probability variation jackpot such as "222" or "444", which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols. A state in which combinations of the same symbols other than the above are lined up on the effective line is displayed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a symbol variation display in each game round, as well as a game round effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit. If the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, 5R as a game rotation effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that it is a probabilistic jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the game round effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the effective line is displayed, 5R as a game rotation effect. A suggestion effect that suggests that it is usually a big hit is executed. In this case, in the game round effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round is a 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect. In the present embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the first round game in the open / close execution mode to the end of the first round game in the open / close execution mode) elapses from the start of execution of the open / close execution mode effect on the symbol display unit 341. Up to, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) that enables selection of music to be output from the speaker 26 as a jackpot game effect is displayed. Hereinafter, the period in which the music selection image 83 is displayed may be referred to as a music selection valid period. On the other hand, when the game rotation effect or the jackpot game effect is not displayed (in the non-game state), the game setting image can be displayed by operating the operation button 20 of the player, and the selection is made based on the game setting image. It is possible to set the game by operating the determination unit 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the determination button 21B). The details of the music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23) in the jackpot game effect (big hit game state) and the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15) in the non-game state will be described later.

The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the operating portion 310 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the operating unit 310 by using a magnet is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act.

The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and is provided on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave into the detection sensor 314a or the detection sensor 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, the illegal act can be detected. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz. Further, the radio wave sensor 36 may be similarly provided around the special winning opening 319b.

The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372, 373, and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. In the LED pair 371, the result of a lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 is displayed by the lighting pattern, triggered by the winning of the through gate 317. In the 7-segment display 372, the variation display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the first operating port 314 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, the variation display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the holding number N and the holding number M of the fluctuation display generated by winning the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are displayed by the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing the ball game balls supplied from the island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9 (see FIG. 5). The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island facility (not shown) to which the game machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the power to various control devices and various drive means provided in the game machine 10. To do.

[System configuration of game machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 is an example of a main control means including a main control device 4 that executes a main control of a game in the game machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 has or does not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity using the magnet or the radio wave based on the detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command to the voice lamp control device 5. For example, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. It is determined based on the information, and is output to the voice lamp control device 5. The hold number command is a voice lamp control device 5 for notifying the hold number N or hold number M after the increase when the hold number N or hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. Is output to. The first hold command and the second hold command are output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the hold number N or the hold number M currently stored in the hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, increases, and the shift command is the hold number. When N or the number of holds M decreases, it is output to the voice lamp control device 5 to notify the number of holds N or the number of holds M after the decrease. The jackpot start command is output to the voice lamp control device 5 when shifting to the jackpot game state. The jackpot end command is output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the jackpot game state ends. In addition, various commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 is interrupted by the main timer described later every time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the interrupt process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clocks of various control bodies in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting various commands transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the electrical configuration for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time by using various counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric service hold area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. Is done. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. Is done. Further, the lottery counter 412a is set to the normal hit random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is in the electric service open state, and the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. The normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and after reaching a preset maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The hold storage area 412b includes a first hold storage area REA, a second hold storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a hold number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of game times in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first hold storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the fluctuation and the stop is referred to as the first special figure game. is there. The second hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a hold number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of game times in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second hold storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays a variable display and a stop display may be referred to as a second special figure game. is there.

Then, when the game ball enters the first operating port 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second operating port 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is described above. It is acquired as the pass / fail information used in the pass / fail determination, and is stored in any of the first hold areas REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB. The pass / fail information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as a pass / fail information acquisition processing unit by executing a process according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counter 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS1, etc.) is individually corresponding to each of the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. It may be provided in.

As described above, in the game machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the REA4 and the second hold storage area REB.

Therefore, the jackpot in the game round executed based on the hit / fail information stored in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 and the second hold storage area REB. In addition to the hit / fail determination, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where it is. In the hold number storage area NAA, the number of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number N.

Further, when the game ball enters the second operating port 315, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NAB, the number of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number M.

That is, in the game machine 10, the first operating port 314 has a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. And, it is possible to hold up to four of the above-mentioned hit / fail information as the winning history of the game ball to the second operating port 315.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of eight, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be held in total. It is possible to withhold the winning / failing information as a winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as a hold processing unit by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB when the symbol change display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is a storage area used for moving each value of the hit / fail information stored in. Specifically, each value of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and each value does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, each value of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Further, it is considered as another embodiment that the values of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA and the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one game round, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery or the like based on various numerical information stored as hit / fail information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REA2 shifts to the first hold area REA1 and the third The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REB2 shifts to the first hold area REB1 and is held third. The pass / fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second hold area REB2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REB4 shifts to the third hold area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 738, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is determined by the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in ROM 411, in the low probability mode (first game state) which is the normal game state and the high probability mode (second game) which is the probability variation game state. Two types are set according to the state). Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B), the number of random numbers that win the jackpot in the low probability mode is two (373, 727), and the number of random numbers that win the jackpot in the high probability mode The number is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low-probability mode winning / failing table and the high-probability mode winning / failing table, two random numbers (373, 727) that win the jackpot are common, but it is possible that they are not common. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number values for winning the jackpot, the result of the jackpot lottery will be wrong.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. In the game machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (C), when the type of the game is the first special figure game, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variation jackpot is 10. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the game is the second special figure game, the number of random numbers for the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14. Yes, the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the game machine 10 is a so-called loop probability change machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special figure game and the second special figure game is the same. Further, in the game machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special figure game is set higher than that in the first special game. That is, in the probabilistic time-shortening game state, the expected value of the game ball when the result of the winning / failing judgment in the jackpot lottery is won is higher than in the normal game state such as the normal time-saving game state or the normal non-time-saving game state. It has been set.

In this embodiment, each of the first operating port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special game by winning the game ball and the second operating port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special game by winning the game ball. An individual distribution table is set in, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 the game ball wins, but it is different from the first special figure game. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same as that of the second special figure game. Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a kind-two type mixer, or the like.

Then, the MPU 41 has the results of the jackpot lottery as "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", and "5R normal jackpot" based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. , And "off".

Here, when the result of the big hit lottery is a 5R probability variable big hit or a 5R normal big hit, the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the probability variation time reduction mode, which is a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, the probability variation time saving mode is continued until the result of the jackpot lottery is determined by the MPU 41 to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, it is executed in the normal time saving mode, which is a low probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is low and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high after the jackpot game is completed. Then, the high frequency support mode in the normal time saving mode continues until the lottery of the preset number of times, for example, 50 times or 100 times, is completed.

By the way, when the game machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of big hits is made after the end of the big hit game at the time of the probability change big hit. The lottery is executed in the probability variation time saving mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), then shifts to the low probability mode, and the high frequency support mode ends. Further, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a fall lottery from the probability variation time reduction mode to the normal time reduction mode or the low probability mode in each game round. If the jackpot lottery result is not correct, the jackpot game state and the high frequency support mode will not be entered. In the present embodiment, a case where the game machine 10 has three types of jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2 round probability variation jackpot, 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot and 16R regular jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

In the game machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in ROM 411, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the front / rear deviation reach and the reach are also generated. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which reach does not occur, is set. Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (D), the value of the random number that is out of front and back is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is reach other than front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of line is 39. ~ 238. It should be noted that the MPU 41 determines that reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the 5R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the game times in which the opening / closing execution mode is entered.

Here, the reach is a variable state in which a state in which a big hit is likely to be won is shown between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or reduced during the execution of these effect processing.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is added by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. For example, it is considered that the winning is won when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the loss is considered when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern with reference to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411. In addition, these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 7 (E), 7 (F), and 7 (G) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table, and a deviation fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 7 (E), 7 (F), and 7 (G), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, and the deviation fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is changed according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is associated in advance. Then, the MPU 41 has a normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", a probability variation jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", and the lottery result is "missing". If it is, refer to each of the deviation fluctuation tables and specify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 7 (E) and 7 (F), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" are obtained according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. When the variation pattern "01" is selected here, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in a normal reach mode in which the variation display time is 30 s. When the variation pattern "02" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in a super reach mode in which the variation display time is 60 s. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in the mode of special reach in which the variation display time is the longest 90s. The types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to these. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach having different characters or stories are prepared as normal reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach selected from the normal reach is executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", and one of the super reach selected from them is executed. To. Super reach is a reach with a longer fluctuation time than normal reach and a shorter fluctuation time than special reach, and the probability of winning a big hit is higher than that of normal reach, and the probability of winning a big hit is lower than that of special reach. It is executed when suggesting to a person.

Further, in the game machine 10, as a special reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach having different characters, stories, and the like are prepared, and one of the special reach selected from the special reach is executed. To. The special reach is a reach having a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach and the super reach, and is a reach including an effect that develops from the normal reach or the super reach, for example.

The reach corresponding to various fluctuation patterns includes a single-shot operation effect in which the single-shot operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a continuous-stroke operation effect in which the continuous operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. , And a player participation type operation effect processing such as a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (G), in the deviation variation table, the variation type is determined for each stop type (reach before and after deviation, reach other than front and rear deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display without reach with the variation display time of 7 s. Further, when the fluctuation pattern "05" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the fluctuation display without reaching with the fluctuation display time of 10 s.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at the deviation pattern without accompanying the advance notice effect such as displaying the character and the message. Is executed. Further, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the deviation pattern that stops at the deviation pattern is displayed with a notice effect such as displaying a character and a message. Will be executed. Further, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the player participation type notice display that reflects the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the voice lamp control device issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Enter in 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU41 has a fluctuation pattern command "A" in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Output any one of "A01" to "A03". Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU41 is a variation pattern command "B01" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "B03". Further, the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "C01" in which, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is added before the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "C03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating that the lottery is out are added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". Output any of. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the lottery result and the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the lottery result and the fluctuation pattern. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Let me.

Therefore, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and various fluctuation tables for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the game machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. This is an example of a sub-control means for executing the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voice or lamp lighting patterns used in various effects. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and the display control device 6 is based on various commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4. A command (control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the MPU 51 executes the game rotation effect (step S1709 in FIG. 15) and the jackpot game effect (step S1710 in FIG. 15), the display of the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the illumination unit. The lighting mode of 27 is controlled. In one example, the MPU 51 executes the output of the music from the speaker 26 and the display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game production.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives various commands from the main control device 4 and inputs the various commands to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment is also conceivable in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26 and an illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on various commands input from the main control device 4. Is. Further, the operation switch 20, the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the determination operation switch 21Ba are connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26, the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the operation of the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214), and the decision button 21B. It is also possible.

The MPU 51 is determined based on various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command input from the main control device 4. Execute arithmetic processing.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 has a variation pattern (combination of stop symbols of the main symbol, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 20B)), and effect based on the variation pattern command. The type (see FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (C))) is determined (see steps S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 19), and a display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 to display the symbol. The symbol variation display in 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates an deviation, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the variable pattern command indicates the 5R probability variable jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot is displayed. Is displayed, and when 16R probability variation jackpot is indicated, a combination of main symbols corresponding to 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on various commands (control signals) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also includes various circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts. The MPU 61 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to various control programs, the ROM 611 is used for variable symbols such as the main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, an off effect image, and a jackpot game effect. Multiple types of images such as an opening effect image, an opening / closing execution effect image, an ending effect image, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25), a top menu image used in game settings, and various setting images developed from the top menu image are stored. There is. In addition, each image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image or a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing of each image, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays various images on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the game machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal indicating that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to obtain a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. When the launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. In addition, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with his thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors and a drive unit, a + 5V voltage for logic used in various control devices, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the game machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the game machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for being charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the various control devices is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, various control devices can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Further, when it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control unit 4]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 8 to 14. Specifically, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process will be omitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 8 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining the detection state of various sensors or switches connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, when the MPU 41 detects that the game ball has entered any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 added 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reached the maximum value. If so, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process described later (step S1004) accompanying the winning of the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, and executes the launch control process (step S1005).

In the launch control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable firing. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to make. The MPU 41 gives an instruction to launch the game ball to the launch control device 8 when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery as to whether or not to set the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 to the electric service open state based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency mode flag. Then, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 250. Judge that. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 250. Judge that. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been won in the through gate processing, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second operating port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged side by side.

[Starting winning process of main control device 4]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 8, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 11). And S1309) are stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the hit / miss information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 of FIG. 12) described later. , The first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command is executed based on this confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the second operating port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds M is the maximum number of holds (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the hold number M (step S1108) if the hold number M is not the maximum hold number (step S1107: No).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 sets each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 8 and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later. It is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the hit / miss information before the hit / miss information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a target for determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 of FIG. 12) described later. Then, the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 10, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 10, if the "first hold command" is read as the "second hold command" and the "hold number N" is read as the "hold number M". Good.

[First hold command setting process of main controller 4]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type (big hit type or deviation) of the first hold command, the fluctuation pattern, and the number of holds N. ..

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process shifts to step S1203, and if it is not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode based on the high probability mode flag that can be set to be turned on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) described later. The high-probability mode flag is set by the MPU 41 to be on when transitioning to high-probability mode and off when transitioning to low-probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B). Execute the pass / fail judgment. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A). The hit / fail judgment is executed.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process shifts to step S1206 and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the read value is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit / fail information is stored in the third hold storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 9, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the hit / miss information stored in the third hold storage area RE3. The value of is read. Of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 9 is determined by the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command is the hold included in the first hold command. By referring to the number N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 the first hold command corresponds to the pass / fail information stored. ..

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

The first hold command set to be turned on in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S1301 of the main process (see FIG. 11) described later. Is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands and then erased. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command, the content is not limited to the one described here. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main control unit 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, the main control process of the game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1306 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S1307 to S1309 are executed in the remaining time.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits external output processing such as a command set in the main timer interrupt processing or the previous main processing to each control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. To execute. For example, when various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are set in the RAM 413, the sub control unit 332 Send the command to. Further, in step S1001 of FIG. 8, it is determined whether or not the prize detection information is stored in the RAM 413, and if the prize detection information is stored in the RAM 413, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variable type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the general winning opening 313 or the like based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 413. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn. Although the game time control process will be described later, in the game time control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command required for symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 8, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1309. Based on each value of, a fluctuation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation display time is set.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery (see step S1604 in FIG. 14). In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot game state including the open / close execution mode, the probabilistic time-short game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the high frequency. It shifts to the normal non-time saving game state which is the support mode, and the normal non-time saving game state which is not the high frequency support mode in the low probability mode.

For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the game round for the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game including the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, or the 5R normal jackpot flag, which is set to be ON in steps S1607, S1608, or S1609 of FIG. 14 described later, is ON at the end of the game round for the jackpot. After the game round for the jackpot is completed, the gaming state is changed to the jackpot gaming state. Then, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 opens the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316, and then the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 elapses, or the variable winning opening 316 When there is a predetermined upper limit of winnings, the opening / closing process of one round for closing the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 is repeatedly executed 5 times or 16 times depending on the jackpot type.

Further, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state when the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot after the execution of the jackpot game, and the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, the game state is changed from the jackpot game state to the normal time saving game state.

Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag according to the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to on when the gaming state is shifted to the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to on when the gaming state is shifted to the normal time-saving gaming state. To do. Further, when the time saving mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets a preset time saving number (50 times, 100 times, etc.) as the number of times the game is executed in the time saving mode in the time saving counter.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display 372, 373 in the main display unit 37 executes the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is the main symbol indicating the lottery result. It will stop at the combination of. Further, by the display control process, the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 executes the symbol variation display only during the predetermined normal symbol variation display time, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating whether or not the normal symbol has been won. It will stop. In the case of winning a normal symbol, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1307: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1307: No), it is until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is reached, step S1307, step S1308, and step S1309 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1307: Yes).

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1307.

[Game times control process]
Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the game times control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 of FIG. 11 will be described.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game machine 10 is in the big hit game, and if it is in the big hit game (step S1401: Yes), the game times control process is terminated and the game is not in the big hit game. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, whether or not the jackpot game is executed is determined based on the jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets on at the start of the jackpot game and turns off at the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot game execution flag is set to on at the start of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command and transmits this jackpot game start command to the voice lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to off at the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command and transmits this jackpot game end command to the voice lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed, the process is shifted to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process shifts to step S1407. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is set to on in step S1614 (see FIG. 14) of the variation start processing described later, and is turned off in step S1405 when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). Judgment is made based on the variable display flag set in.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display, and if it determines that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the game turn control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the combination of the main symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the game times on the 7-segment display 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37. It is displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405). When the process of step S1405 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the game times control process.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 determines whether or not both the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB are 0. To do. Here, when both the number of holds N and the number of holds M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the game times control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of holds N and the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process shifts to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variation display based on the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the game turn control process. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M corresponding to the second special figure game is 0, and if the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505-S1507>
Step S1505 shifts to the case where the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts to the case where both or one of the hold number M and the hold number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the hold number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving mode flag that can be set to be turned on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to on, and the time saving mode flag is set to on. If so (step S1508: Yes), the counter value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S1509). On the other hand, if the time saving mode flag is not set to ON (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 ends the data setting process.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, in the MPU 41, when the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the time saving mode flag is set to off (step S1511), and the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), The data setting process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S1408 in FIG.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag that can be set to be turned on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to on (step S1601), and the high probability mode flag is turned on. If is set to (step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1602, and if the high probability mode flag is not set to on (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 corresponds to the jackpot winning by the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the winning / failing information currently stored in the execution area AE based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B). Whether or not it is a value is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, in the MPU 41, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 currently stored in the execution area AE is the jackpot winning based on the low probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 7A). Executes the validity judgment of whether or not it is the corresponding value.

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a big hit. Then, when the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot (step S1604: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 has a jackpot type of 5R probability variation jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 7C). (Step S1605), and whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S1606).

When the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to on (step S1607). The 5R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / fail information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 5R probability variation jackpot. Further, in step S1607, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot is also set based on the winning / failing information. The 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start processing. When the process of step S1607 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on (step S1608). The 16R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / miss information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in step S1608, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot is also set based on the winning / failing information. The 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start processing. When the process of step S1608 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the winning / failing information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 5R normal jackpot. Further, in step S1609, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot is also set based on the winning / failing information. The 5R normal jackpot flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start processing. When the process of step S1609 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination is not a big hit (step S1604: No), the MPU 41 sets the miss flag to on (step S1610). The miss flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the win / loss information currently stored in the execution area AE is missed. Further, in step S1610, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order is also set based on the winning / failing information. The off flag is set to off at the end of the fluctuation start processing. When the process of step S1610 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the 7-segment display 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the game times in the fluctuation display time counter. Specifically, when the normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 7E). Further, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 7 (F)). Further, when the deviation flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 7 (G)).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round and the variation pattern specified in step S1611, and stores it in the RAM 512. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 11) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 has "A01" to "A" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". One of "A03" is set as a fluctuation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set as a fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating that the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set as a fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 changes any of "D01" to "D08" in which "D" indicating that the lottery results are out of "01" to "08" is added. Set as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out of front / back", reach other than front / back out, or complete out of line in the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display in-progress flag to on (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops in the state of the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610 after the variation display time set in step S1611 elapses.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 74.

As another embodiment, it is conceivable that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. The description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a 1 msec cycle.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S1701), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702), a selection button operation detection process (step S1703), and a selection operation detection. Pattern determination process (step S1704), decision button operation detection process (step S1705), decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S1706), counter update process (step S1707), command determination process (step S1708), game rotation effect process (step S1708). Step S1709), the jackpot game effect processing (step S1710), and the game setting processing (step S1711) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the game machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be judged whether or not there is.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Further, in step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation history of the operation button 20 includes the operation states of the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals from the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operating state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operating state is stored as the second detection flag, and the previous operating state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation button detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button detection pattern determination process, an operation for determining the operation state for the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the pattern flag. The operation pattern flag includes the first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of turning on and off the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is continued. Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 has started. Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is completed. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1902 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), and performs the process when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No). The process proceeds to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1903 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No). The process proceeds to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1904 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No). The process proceeds to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the second operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 18A). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S1905>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S1901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Determine (step S1905). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1906 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No). The process proceeds to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1907 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No). The process proceeds to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the first operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 18A). Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state by using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1910 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No). The process proceeds to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" are generated as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the first operation pattern. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 18 (A)). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 is completed). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state by using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 18 (A)). The MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection process]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1703 of FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes the upper selection button operation process, the lower selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704 of FIG. 15), the MPU 51 performs an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process. Execute.

<Top selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 is above the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. The upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "upper selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "upper selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has an operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continued.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, and the second 1 Set the upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines from the operation history of the lower selection button 212, which is determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "lower selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has an operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212, and sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "left selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has an operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213. When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continued.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for the left selection button 213 three times, and sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines from the operation history of the right selection button 214, which is determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the “operation detection flag” is set to the “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to the “right selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18E, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states for three times of the right selection button 214. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the right selection button 214, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the right selection button 214, and sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Enter button operation detection process]
In the decision button operation detection process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state for the decision button 21B from the operation history of the decision button 21B determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. Set the operation pattern flag to determine. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 18 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 generated "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the determination button 21B three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the determination button 21B, and makes the first determination. Set the operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has been started). ..

Further, the MPU 51 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states for the three times of the determination button 21B, and makes the first determination. Set the operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B is completed). ..

Further, the MPU 51 has all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the decision button 21B. Is set to off. The MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 15, in the counter update process (step S1707), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter and the fluctuation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 100. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like. In the present embodiment, for example, the fluctuation display counter determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53 (A)) in which the fluctuation display of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is stopped in step S3401 of FIG. In this case, it is referred to in the case of determining whether or not the variable display of the main symbol is started in the symbol display unit 341 in step S3501 of FIG. 57, step S3601 of FIG. 58, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process (step S1708 of FIG. 15). In the command determination process, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S2001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2002. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2001: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2001, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is targeted for processing. For example, in the processing work storage area. It will be remembered.

<Step S2002>
In step S2002, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2003 when it is a variable pattern command (step S2002: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2006 when the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2002: No).

<Step S2003>
In step S2003, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (combination of stop symbols of the main symbol, variation type, and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (A)), a variation type table (see FIG. 20 (B)), and an effect type table (see FIG. 20 (B)) stored in ROM 511 in advance. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on (see FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to on. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to on. Set the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on when is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the second main symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. The production type table includes a normal reach production table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 21 (A)), a super reach production table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 21 (B)), and a special reach production table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 21 (B)). 21 (C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 20A is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 20A, in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is defined. In addition, FIG. 20A shows a symbol combination, "777", indicating that the main symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot). Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the doublet other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating that it is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

If the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "7" is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "333" whose stop display result of the main symbol suggests a 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag to on. .. The first promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 5R probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot in a state suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot (the jackpot in FIG. 22). Step S2103 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial provisional music output processing of FIG. 37, step S2701 in the provisional music output processing of FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selected music output processing of FIG. 41, and the like).

Furthermore, if the lottery result is "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9". The design is decided. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which indicates the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is stopped and displayed as the stop display result of the main symbol. Can be. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and "3" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to on and "3" as the first stop symbol. And when the main symbol other than "7" is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to on. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 16R probability variation jackpot is in the state suggesting that the 5R probability variation jackpot is (the jackpot game of FIG. 22). Step S2106 in the effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial temporary music output process of FIG. 37, step S2701 in the temporary music output process of FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selected music output process of FIG. 41, and the like). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 16R probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 16R probability variation jackpot is in the state suggesting that the 5R normal jackpot is (the jackpot in FIG. 22). Step S2109 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial provisional music output processing of FIG. 37, step S2701 in the provisional music output processing of FIG. 40, step S2803 in the selected music output processing of FIG. 41, and the like).

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined to be the same symbols as the first stop symbol previously determined. As a result, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display unit 341 is determined in the game round.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Will be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "out", the out-of-order type selected based on the out-of-type table (FIG. 7 (D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the deviation type is front-back deviation reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than the front-rear deviation, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the symbols before and after the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. When the deviation type is completely out, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 20B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 20B, in the variation type table, the variation display time and the contents of the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation pattern command "A01" whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" and whose fluctuation pattern is "01" is associated with a fluctuation display time "30s" and a fluctuation type "normal reach". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach". The fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose result is "16 probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "special reach". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "no reach", and the lottery result is obtained. The fluctuation pattern command "D05", which is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "05", is associated with the fluctuation display time "10s" and the fluctuation type "no reach".

Further, FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect type table. The production type table is defined for each variable type. FIG. 21 (A) is a normal reach effect table when the variation type is normal reach, FIG. 21 (B) is a super reach effect table when the variation type is super reach, and FIG. 21 (C) is a super reach effect table. This is a special reach production table when the variation type is special reach. In the present embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but the types of effects may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 21, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect table shown in FIG. 21 (A), depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation), "effect X1" to the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter "Direction X5" is defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is the normal reach, the MPU 51 selects the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the super reach effect table shown in FIG. 21B, "effect Y1" to "effect Y5" are defined as the effect types corresponding to the values of the effect type counters according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the special reach effect table shown in FIG. 21C, "effect Z1" to "effect Z5" are defined as the effect types corresponding to the values of the effect type counters according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is the special reach, the MPU 51 selects the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Then, the MPU 51 sets a variation pattern command, a variation type table, an effect type table, a stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the effect type counter, and a display variation pattern command indicating the variation type and the effect type, and sets the RAM 512. Remember. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2005 described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes the symbol variation display and the effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. The display fluctuation pattern command may include information on whether or not a jackpot has been won.

<Step S2004>
In step S2004, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is subtracted one by one in the counter update process (step S1707) of FIG. 15, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is in progress, the remaining time of the fluctuation display time, and the like based on the fluctuation display counter. It is possible to judge. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2005>
In step S2005, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type, and the content of the effect type to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. Let me. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the main symbol determined in step S2003. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image and an effect image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variation display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until the preset variation display time elapses, and a plurality of variations are displayed. The fluctuation of the main symbol of is stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next game round or the process corresponding to the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type and the effect type specified by the display variation pattern command are executed.

<Step S2006>
In step S2006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to on at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2007 when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2006: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2006: No). To step S2009.

<Step S2007>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2007). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process for determining an effect to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game production start flag to on. The jackpot game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23, which will be described later (step S2201).

<Step S2009>
In step S2009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is terminated, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to off at the end of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2010 when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2009: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2009: No). To step S2011.

<Step S2010>
In step S2010, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to on. The jackpot game effect end flag is set on, for example, in step S2013 described later, and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later. (Step S2216).

<Step S2011>
In step S2011, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a pending command. The hold command includes a first hold command and a second hold command as described above. The first hold command includes information that identifies the jackpot type or miss, the fluctuation pattern, and the number N of hold numbers N of the fluctuation display generated by winning the first operating port 314. The second hold command includes information that identifies the jackpot type or miss, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number M of the fluctuation display generated by winning the second operating port 315. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2012 when the received command is a hold command (step S2011: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2013 when the received command is not a hold command (step S2011: No). Transition.

<Step S2012>
In step S2012, when the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or loss, the fluctuation pattern, the number of holds N, and the like specified by the first hold command in the fluctuation type area of the RAM 512. .. Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or deviation, the fluctuation pattern, the number of holds M, and the like specified by the second hold command in the fluctuation type area of the RAM 512.

<Step S2013>
In step S2013, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing the process based on the other commands received from the main control device 4. For example, the MPU 51 sets the open / close execution mode start flag on when it receives the open / close execution mode start command, and sets the open / close execution mode end flag on when it receives the open / close execution mode end command. The open / close execution mode start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the opening effect and start the open / close execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23, which will be described later (steps S2206 to S2208). .. On the other hand, the open / close execution mode end flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to end the open / close execution mode effect and start the ending effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23, which will be described later (steps S2212 to S2214). ..

[Big hit game production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2007 in FIG. 19). In the jackpot game effect determination process, the effect to be executed in the jackpot game such as the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect to be executed in the jackpot game is determined.

<Step S2101>
In step S2101, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect to be executed between the transition to the jackpot game and the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the main symbol that has been stopped and displayed, based on, for example, the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined opening effect type information to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as the opening effect, the MPU 51 is an effect that clearly indicates that the symbol combination is "777" and is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the symbol combination is "333" and is a 5R probability variation jackpot. When the suggested effect and the symbol combination are doublets other than "777" and "333", the effect suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined not according to the jackpot type but according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the main symbol displayed as stopped.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect to be executed after the opening / closing execution mode is finished and before the jackpot game is finished. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect according to the jackpot type, for example, based on the ending effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined ending effect type information to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

Here, the ending effect informs the player that the jackpot game ends after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, in the ending effect, for example, information such as a jackpot lottery result (clarification of the game state that shifts after the jackpot game ends) in the game times leading to the jackpot game is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, in the ending effect, the lottery result becomes a big hit in the normal time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the normal non-time saving game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode). When the first hit is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, an image clearly indicating that the transition to the probability variation time-shortening game state, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the initial hit is 5R. An image clearly indicating that the normal non-time-saving game state is entered when the game is a normal big hit is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates the transition to the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state is, for example, "○○ RUSH rush". On the other hand, an image that clearly indicates that the normal non-time saving game state is entered is, for example, "chance zone entry", and the number of time saving is also displayed. In addition, in the ending effect when the lottery result is a big hit in the probabilistic time-shortening game state, an image clearly indicating that the probabilistic time-shortening game state is entered again is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the transition to the probabilistic time-shortening game state is made again is, for example, "○○ RUSH continuation". In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of transitions to the probabilistic time-shortening game state for one initial hit (for example, the number of continuations of RUSH) and the image of the character that appeared in the jackpot effect in the game that led to the jackpot game. It may be displayed on the display unit 341. An image showing the number of transitions to the probabilistic time-short game state and an image of the character are determined in this step S2102.

Further, in the ending effect, an image related to the number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot game, the total number of balls to be ejected in the consecutive villa, and the like is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the ending effect may display a definite image or the like that clearly indicates that the reserved villa described later will be executed. These images are determined in step S2214 of the jackpot game effect processing, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, for example.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag is set to on, and if the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2104. 1 When the promotion effect flag is off (step S2103: No), the process proceeds to step S2106. The first promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot during or after the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect is being executed or after the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot. Indicates whether or not to execute. For this first promotion effect flag, the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", and as a stop display result of the main symbol, a symbol combination (symbol combination other than "333" and "777") suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is determined. If this is the case, it is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the open / close execution mode. For example, the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined type information of the open / close execution mode effect for the 5R normal jackpot to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 determines the 5R probability variation promotion effect. The 5R probability variation promotion effect is determined based on, for example, the 5R probability variation promotion effect table stored in ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined type of the 5R probability variation promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a probability variation promotion effect command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag is set to on, and if the second promotion effect flag is on (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and the process proceeds to step S2107. 2 When the promotion effect flag is off (step S2106: No), the process proceeds to step S2109. The second promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot during or after the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect, which indicates that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot. It indicates whether or not to execute. The second promotion effect flag is a command determination in FIG. 19 when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a symbol combination suggesting a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variation jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol. It is set to on in step S2003 in the process.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 5R probability variation jackpot (open / close execution mode effect for 5R probability variation jackpot) as an effect to be executed in the open / close execution mode. For example, the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined type information of the open / close execution mode effect for the 5R probability variation jackpot to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 determines the 16R promotion effect. The 16R promotion effect is determined based on, for example, the 16R promotion effect table stored in ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the selected 16R promotion effect type to the display control device 6 as a 16R promotion effect command.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third promotion effect flag is set to on, and if the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2109: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2110, and the process proceeds to step S2110. 3 When the promotion effect flag is off (step S2109: No), the process proceeds to step S2112. Whether the third promotion effect flag executes a 16R probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot during or after the 5R normal jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. It indicates whether or not. When the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and the symbol combination suggesting the 5R normal jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol, the third promotion effect flag is step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. Is set to on.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the open / close execution mode, and determines the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines the 16R probability variation promotion effect. The 16R probability variation promotion effect is determined based on, for example, the 16R probability variation promotion effect table stored in ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the information of the determined 16R probability variation promotion effect type to the display control device 6 as a 16R probability variation promotion effect command.

<Step S2112>
In step S2112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R probability variation jackpot flag set to be ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is ON (step S2112). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2113, and when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is off (step S2112: No), the process proceeds to step S2114.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 5R probability variation jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and determines the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution. The mode effect type information is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command, and the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag set to be ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and when the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is ON (step S2114). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2115, and when the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is off (step S2114: No), the process proceeds to step S2116.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 16R probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the open / close execution mode. For example, the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined type information of the opening / closing execution mode effect for the 16R probability variation jackpot to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command, and sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to off.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, similarly to step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the open / close execution mode, and determines the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command, and the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to off.

[Big hit game production processing]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing (step S1710 in FIG. 15). In the jackpot game effect processing, the opening effect, ending effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, etc. determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 22 are executed.

<Step S2201>
In step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to be on in step S2008 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is on ( Step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Steps S2202 and S2203>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the opening effect start process (step S2202) and sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2203). In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2101 of FIG. 22, and also serves the display control device 6 as the opening effect. A command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image effect is transmitted.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the so-called reserved consecutive villa is executed after the end of the jackpot game. The hold consecutive villa is a jackpot (5R) as hit / fail information in any of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode. It is executed when the information indicating that it is a probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) is included. That is, the reserved consecutive villa means that the jackpot game occurs within the number of games held up to the number M held at the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of holdings M at the end of the big hit game is 4, the case where the big hit occurs within 4 times of the game is called a holding consecutive villa. Whether or not the hold consecutive villa is executed can be determined by referring to, for example, the variable type area of the RAM 512 and whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second hold command is stored.

However, in step S2204, the variable type area is referred to at the stage of starting the opening effect, and it is determined whether or not the reserved consecutive villa is executed. That is, if the result of the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the open / close execution mode effect is a jackpot, it is not subject to the determination of the reserved consecutive villa in step S2204. Regarding the start winning of the game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the open / close execution mode effect, for example, it is reserved in the ending effect start process of step S2214 described later. In the case of executing the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect by determining whether or not the hold consecutive villa final effect is executed, in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the jackpot game effect determination process. In the decided ending production, the pending consecutive villa confirmation production is executed.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to on, and ends the jackpot game production process. The reserved consecutive villa flag is set in the 5R probability variation song selection button production lottery table (see FIG. 45) or the 16R probability variation song selection button production lottery for determining the song selection button production in steps S2904 and step S2906 of the song selection button production process of FIG. 42, which will be described later. Referenced when selecting a table (see FIG. 48). Specifically, the reserved consecutive villa flag is set in steps S3003, S3008, S3014 and S3019 in the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process of FIG. 43, and steps S3103, S3108, S3114 and S3114 in the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process of FIG. Seen in S3119. In other words, in the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect described later, the reserved consecutive villa final effect is executed for the reserved consecutive villa whose jackpot lottery result is a big hit before the opening effect is started. It should be noted that the determination in step S2204 is determined in steps S3003, S3008, S3014 and S3019 of the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process of FIG. It may be performed in S3119. In this case, since the judgment as to whether or not the reserved consecutive villa is executed is performed at the stage of determining the music selection button production, the reserved consecutive villas in the lottery during the jackpot game are also until the music selection button production is started. Therefore, there is a higher possibility that the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect will be executed as compared with the case of determining whether the reserved consecutive villa is executed at the stage of starting the opening effect (step S2204). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved for the player who wants to know during the jackpot game that the reserved consecutive villa will be executed. In addition, the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect may be executed in the ending effect as described above. In this case, the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is when the player has set not to execute the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect as the song selection button effect (step S4113 in the song selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 66 described later, or described later. It may be executed as a limited effect of step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73 (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on). As a result, even when the player has set non-execution for the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the reserved consecutive villa will be executed.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode start flag set to be on in step S2013 of FIG. 19 is set to on, and when the open / close execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S2207, and when the open / close execution mode start flag is off (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2212.

<Steps S2207 and S2208>
When the open / close execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the opening effect end process (step S2207) and executes the open / close execution mode effect start process (step S2208). That is, the MPU 51 ends the opening effect and starts the open / close execution mode effect determined in steps S2104, S2107, S2110, S2113, S2115 or S2116 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 22.

<Steps S2209 to S2211>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 executes a music selection image display process for displaying a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) for allowing the player to select a music output in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game effect. Next, the MPU 51 outputs a music (initial tentative music) corresponding to the tentative music image 832 (initial tentative music image) first displayed as the tentative music image 832 in the music selection image 83. The output process is executed (step S2210). The tentatively selected music image 832 is selected by the player's decision operation on the decision button 21B from among a plurality of songs (20 songs in the present embodiment) that can be output from the speaker 26 by the player's selection in the jackpot state as described above. It is an image which shows that it is a possible tentative selection music. Further, the MPU 51 sets the open / close execution mode start flag to off (step S2211), and ends the jackpot game effect processing. The details of the music selection image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. The details of the initial provisional music output processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

<Step S2212>
In step S2212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode end flag set to be on in step S2013 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on, and when the open / close execution mode end flag is on ( Step S2212: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2213, and when the open / close execution mode end flag is off (step S2212: No), the process proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2213>
When the open / close execution mode end flag is on (step S2212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the open / close execution mode effect end process (step S2213). In the open / close execution mode effect end process, the MPU 51 ends, for example, the execution of the image effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the output of the music from the speaker 26.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
The MPU 51 executes the ending effect start process (step S2214), sets the open / close execution mode end flag to off (S2215), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 to start the ending effect determined in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the jackpot game effect determination process described above. When the MPU 51 displays an image related to the number of balls to be ejected in the jackpot game or the total number of balls to be ejected in the consecutive villa as the ending effect on the symbol display unit 341, the image related to the ball to be ejected is displayed before the start of the ending effect. decide. Further, when the MPU 51 executes the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect in the ending effect, the hold consecutive villa confirmation image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 before the start of the ending effect, the hold consecutive villa confirmation sound is output from the speaker 26, and the like. The final production of the pending consecutive villas will be decided.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to be on in step S2010 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is on ( Step S2216: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2217, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the process proceeds to step S2219.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the ending effect end process (step S2217), sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218), and sets the jackpot game effect end flag off (step S2218). End the production process.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
In step S2219, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection processing flag set to be on in step S2306 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 24, which will be described later, is set to ON, and the music selection processing flag is set. When it is on (step S2219: Yes), the music selection process is executed (step S2220), and when the music selection processing flag is off (step S2219: No), the jackpot game effect processing is terminated. The details of the music selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

[Music selection image display processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection image display process (step S2209 in FIG. 23). In the music selection image display processing, the music selection image 83 for allowing the player to select the music output in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 25). Further, FIG. 25 is an example of the music selection image display screen 82 including the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the unselected music described later in the music selection image 83 is tentatively selected. In the following, an example of the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIG. 25, and then the music selection image display process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

As shown in FIG. 25, on the music selection image display screen 82, the music selection image 83, the selection determination unit image 84, the operation explanation image 85, and the lyrics telop image 86 are displayed. Further, on the music selection image display screen 82, it is not essential to display an image other than the music selection image 83, and it is not necessary to display a part or all of the images other than the music selection image 83. Other images may be displayed in place of a part or all of the images other than the above.

The music selection image 83 is for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the speaker 26 from a plurality of music (20 songs of music A to T in the present embodiment) prepared in advance for output from the speaker 26. Is. A predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) is provided in advance for the number of music selection images 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and some of the plurality of music (20 songs in this embodiment). The music selection image 83 for (10 songs) is displayed in the display area 837 preset in the symbol display unit 341. That is, the number of the plurality of songs is larger than the number of music selection images 83 (total number of selected music image 831, provisionally selected music image 832, and unselected music image 833). In FIG. 25, the music that is not displayed in the display area 837 among the plurality of music is indicated by a virtual line (reference numeral 838 in the figure). Further, as for the number of the plurality of songs that can be output in the jackpot game, the number of the plurality of songs prepared in advance for output from the speaker 26 is larger than the display upper limit number. The number may be the same.

The music selection image 83 includes a selected music image 831, a provisionally selected music image 832, and an unselected music image 833 that are displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Here, the distinction from each other is not limited to the case where the selected music image 831, the tentatively selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 themselves are distinguishable. For example, the selected music image 831, the tentatively selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 have the same display mode, and these images 831, 832, 834 are marked (for example, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 in FIG. 25). It also includes the case where it becomes possible to distinguish each other by adding an image such as.

The selected music image 831 is an image showing that the music is already selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music A, the music J, and the music D corresponds to the selected music image 831. The tentatively selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the tentatively selected music is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a decision operation on the decision button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music H corresponds to the provisionally selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 is an image showing that the music is a music other than the selected music and is an unselected music that has never been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music K, the music L, the music M, the music I, the music B, and the music C corresponds to the unselected music image 833. However, as will be described later, an upper limit number (3 in this embodiment) is set for the selected songs, and even if the songs have already been selected by the player, the songs exceeding the upper limit are already selected. It is processed as an unselected song, not a song.

In the music selection image 83, the provisional music image 832 is changed by the player performing an operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The details of the selected music image 831, the tentatively selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833, and the details of the modification example of the tentatively selected music image 832 by the player's operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 will be described later. To do.

Note that FIG. 25 shows a case where the selected music image 831, the tentatively selected music image 832, and the non-selected music image 834 are displayed at the same time as the music selection image 83 for convenience of explanation. As will be described later, the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed in the music selection image 83 that is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 26).

These music images 831 to 833 (music selection images 83) are displayed in the display area 837 set on the left side of the symbol display unit 341. This display area 837 is set to, for example, an area of 1/3 or less of the area of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341, preferably 1/4 or less, and more preferably 1/5 or less. Is set to the area of. The display area 837 may be set as a part of the music selection image display screen 82, and does not necessarily have to be set on the left side of the music selection image display screen 82. For example, the right side and the upper side of the music selection image display screen 82. It may be on the lower side or the like.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, a music selection image is displayed in the entire area or substantially the entire area of the display screen. For example, a plurality of rectangular music selection images may be displayed in a matrix on the entire area or substantially the entire display screen. In such a conventional game machine, the open / close execution mode effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 cannot be visually recognized while the music selection image is displayed on the display screen, and the open / close execution mode effect is performed during the music selection. Can't enjoy.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the display area 837 is set on a part of the music selection image display screen 82 (on the left side in the present embodiment). Therefore, in the game machine 10, even when the music selection image 83 is displayed, the player can visually recognize the opening / closing mode effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect can be enjoyed even while the music is being selected. it can.

Further, in the display area 837, the selected music image 831, the tentatively selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed vertically arranged in this order. Specifically, in the music selection image 83, in the display area 837, up to the third is the selected music image 831, the fourth is the tentatively selected music image 832, and the remaining six are the unselected music images 833. .. In the music selection image 83 arranged in this way, the provisional music selection image 832 is displayed between the selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. The music selection image 83 is not limited to a display mode in which a plurality of music selection images 83 are arranged vertically in the display area 837, and may be a display mode in which a plurality of music selection images 83 are arranged vertically, diagonally, in a matrix, or the like.

The selected music image 831 is an image showing that the music is already selected by the player. The selected music image 831 is a provisionally selected music image 832 and unselected music image 831 depending on the color, size, shape, etc. of the effect around the contour portion, in addition to the contour portion such as the frame, the character portion, and the character background portion. It is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the selected music image 833. Further, an upper limit is set in advance for the number of selected music images 831 in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the selected music image 831 is 3. The upper limit is not limited to 3, but may be 1, but it is preferable to select from 2 or more. However, the upper limit of the selected music image 831 is the number of each image 831 to 834 displayed as the music selection image 83, the ease of selection when selecting the selected music based on the selected music image 831, and the like. If so, it is preferable to select from the range of 2 to 5.

The selected music image 831 is given a display order (music order). In the present embodiment, the display order is increased in the order of the newest song selection date and time, and the selected song having the higher display order is displayed at a position closer to the provisionally selected song image 832 in the initial song selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, the selected music images 831 for the selected music A, J, and D are displayed in the display area 837 at the positions from the top to the third in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. ing. That is, the selection dates and times of the music A, the music J, and the music D among the plurality of songs are new in this order. Further, in the present embodiment, the selected music image 831 is displayed in a predetermined area while the music selection image 83 is displayed. Specifically, the selected music image 831 is fixedly displayed at the position from the top to the third in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83, and even when the temporary selection image 832 described later is changed. The position of the selected music image 831 does not change. However, when the selected music is tentatively selected, the music selection image 83 for the tentatively selected selected music is displayed as the tentatively selected music image 832 instead of the selected music image 831 as described later (FIG. FIG. 27 (A) to 27 (C)).

The display order for the selected music image 831 may be given based on conditions other than the selection date and time, for example, the selection frequency. The selection frequency is, for example, the cumulative number of selections, the number of selections in the latest predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and the selection rate in the latest predetermined number of times. In the following, the term "selection frequency" is used in the same meaning.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (character "good" in the example of FIG. 25) is attached to the side of the selected music image 831 to distinguish it from the provisional music image 832 and the unselected music image 833. Is simplified. However, the selected music image 831 may omit the predetermined mark as long as it can be distinguished from the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833, or the selected music image 831 is temporarily selected. The display mode may be the same as that of the music image 832 and the unselected music image 833, and the distinction may be made only by the predetermined mark, and there is no limitation on the display mode.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, the image for the tentatively selected music is made distinguishable from other music, but the image for the tentatively selected music is displayed in the same manner including the music selected in the past. .. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selected music image 831 for the selected music is distinguished from the unselected music image 832 for the unselected music, so that the music selection image 83 has been selected in the past. It is possible to distinguish a selected song with a song from an unselected song. As a result, the selected music can be easily found, and the operation of selecting the selected music becomes easy. Further, when the display position of the selected music image 831 is set to a predetermined area and the provisional music image 832 is displayed adjacent to the lower part of the selected music image 831, the player displays the music selection image 83. In this case, the most recently selected selected song can be easily found, and the most recently selected song can be selected again by the operation of the selection determination unit 21. Further, since the selected music is given a display order and is displayed at a position closer to the provisionally selected music image 832 in the initial music selection image 83 in descending order of the display order, the same music is included in the maximum number of selected music. Will not be. Therefore, the player can easily find the selected music to be selected, for example, when he / she wants to select a selected music other than the music when the same music is repeatedly selected. As a result, the player can reduce the operational burden when reselecting the previously selected music.

Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a plurality of songs in a predetermined music selection valid period (for example, a period during which the opening / closing execution mode of the first R is executed) for one jackpot game. However, when the music is selected a plurality of times in one jackpot game, only the last selected music is regarded as the selected music (step S2813 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41). .. Further, when the number of selected songs is less than the upper limit, for example, when the number of selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of selected music images 831 corresponding to the number of selected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of selected songs is 0, or when the player has set not to display the selected song image 831 as described later (step S4013 of the song list display setting process of FIG. 63, or When the selected music image non-display setting flag is set to on in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71), the selected music image 831 is not displayed. At this time, unselected music images 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 are displayed as the number of selected music is less than the upper limit. As a result, even when the number of selected music images 831 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit, the unselected music image 833 is displayed instead of the selected music image 831. A specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or deficiency.

The tentatively selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the tentatively selected music is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a decision operation on the decision button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music H is a tentatively selected music, and the tentatively selected music image 832 can be distinguished from the selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. A predetermined mark (in the present embodiment, an indicator image 835 of the character "temporary") is attached to the side of the temporary selection music image 832, and a cursor image 836 for emphasizing that the temporary selection music image 832 is It is surrounded by.

The tentatively selected music image 832 may be distinguished from the selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833, and the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the tentatively selected music image 832 may be selected. The display mode may be the same as that of the music image 831 or the unselected music image 833, and only the predetermined mark may be used, and there is no limitation on the display mode.

Further, the provisionally selected music image 832 is changed according to the operation by the player on the selection determination unit 21. In the present embodiment, when the selected music image 831 is displayed, a predetermined area, that is, the selected music image 831 is displayed at the position from the top to the third in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. Therefore, the mode of changing the tentatively selected music image 832 differs depending on whether the selected music is tentatively selected or the unselected music is tentatively selected. Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an initial display example of the music selection image 83, and FIGS. 27 (A) to 27 (C) are diagrams showing a modification example of the provisional music image 832 in the selected music. is there. Further, in FIGS. 26 and 27 (A) to 27 (C), only the display area 837 of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 26, when temporarily selecting a song from unselected songs, the lower selection button 212 is operated. By doing so, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain unchanged, and the unselected music image 833 is scrolled downward. In the example shown in FIG. 26, by operating the lower selection button 212, the temporarily selected music is changed in a loop in the order of music P → music T → music S → ... → music F → music E → music P. .. Further, when the desired unselected music is tentatively selected, the unselected music can be output from the speaker 26 as the selected music by operating the enter button 21B.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the music selection image 83 that is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) in the music loop when the music is temporarily selected from the unselected music. Is arranged at the farthest position with respect to the initial provisional music image 832 (initial provisional music).

On the other hand, when temporarily selecting a song from the selected songs, the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 is operated. Specifically, by first operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 26, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are displayed from the music selection image 83 for the music P as shown in FIG. 27 (A). It moves to the music selection image 83 for the music A displayed one above the music P. As a result, the music selection image 83 for the music P is changed from the tentatively selected music image 832 to the unselected music image 833, while the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the selected music image 831 to the tentatively selected music image 832. Will be done. Further, by performing an operation on the decision button 21B, it becomes possible to select the tentatively selected music A (selected music).

Further, by operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 27 (A), the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 change from the music selection image 83 to the music J to the music A as shown in FIG. 27 (B). Moves to the music selection image 83 for. As a result, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the tentatively selected music image 832 to the selected music image 831, while the music selection image 83 for the music J is changed from the selected music image 831 to the tentatively selected music image 832. Will be done. Further, by performing an operation on the enter button 21B, it becomes possible to select the tentatively selected music J (selected music).

Similarly, by operating the upper operation button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 27 (B), the music selection image 83 for the music J is the selected music from the provisionally selected music image 832 as shown in FIG. 27 (C). While the image 831 is changed, the music selection image 83 for the music D is changed from the selected music image 831 to the provisional music image 832. As a result, it becomes possible to select the tentatively selected music D (selected music) by operating the enter button 21B. Even if the upper selection button 211 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 27 (C), the provisionally selected music image 832 is not changed, and the state in which the music D is temporarily selected is maintained.

On the other hand, by operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27 (B) or FIG. 27 (C), the indicator image 835 and the indicator image 835 as shown in FIG. 27 (A) or FIG. 27 (B) The cursor image 836 moves to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music one level below, the tentatively selected music is changed, and the tentatively selected music A or music J is selected by operating the enter button 21B. It becomes possible to do.

By operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27 (A), the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 become the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music P which is the unselected music one below. As it moves, the tentatively selected song is changed. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 26, the lower selection button 212 is operated to temporarily select a song from the unselected songs, and the enter button 21B is operated to select the unselected song. It can be output from the speaker 26.

By the way, conventionally, as a game machine, there is a game machine 10 according to the present embodiment in which a song to be output during a jackpot game can be selected from a plurality of songs. The number of songs that can be selected in the jackpot game differs depending on the model, but some of the songs can be selected from 20 or more songs to be output during the special game. When the number of selectable songs is large, the range of song selection becomes wide, so that not only can various songs be enjoyed, but also there is a high possibility that songs that suit the tastes of the player are included. Therefore, in a game machine that allows selection of music during a jackpot game, the player is allowed to listen to various songs, and the player is made to find a favorite song to improve the attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the special game. It is possible to improve the motivation to play.

However, in the conventional game machine, the image for the tentatively selected music is displayed separately from the image for the other music, but the selected music selected in the past or the music selection image 83 is the first as the tentative music image 832. Images for non-selected songs that were displayed in, but were not selected by the player, were displayed without distinction from each other. Therefore, when the player wants to repeatedly select a favorite song or wants to listen to a previously selected song again, it becomes difficult to find the target song, and even if the target song is found, the target song is found. You are forced to perform troublesome operations. The difficulty of finding such a target song increases as the number of selectable songs increases. In addition, some gaming machines have a set period (valid period for selecting music) during which the music to be output during the jackpot game can be selected. For example, there is a gaming machine in which the valid period of music selection is limited to the opening effect in the jackpot game or the end of the first round of the round game (opening / closing execution mode). In such a game machine, it becomes more difficult to find the target music because the target music must be searched for within a limited period of time which is not so long. In addition, if it is troublesome and difficult to select the target music in the jackpot game, there is a concern that the player will not select the music in the jackpot game. In this case, by preparing multiple songs, letting the player select a song and listening to various songs, and letting the player find a favorite song, the degree of attention and interest in the jackpot game is improved. The purpose of improving the motivation to play is buried.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music selection image 83 for causing the player to select the music is a selected music indicating that the music has already been selected by the player. The music image 831 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so as to be distinguishable from the unselected music image 833. In this way, the selected music image 831 can be distinguished from the unselected music image 833, so that the player can select the selected music that has been previously selected from the music selection images 83. , The selected music can be tentatively selected and selected based on the selected music image 831. Specifically, the player operates the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 of the selection determination unit 21 while confirming the position of the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 to select the selected music. It can be tentatively selected and displayed as a tentatively selected music image 832. In this state, by operating the decision button 21B, the selected music can be output from the speaker 26 again as the selected music. Therefore, the player can easily find the selected music even when the number of selectable music is large, such as when he / she wants to repeatedly select his / her favorite music or when he / she wants to listen to the previously selected music again. Can be done. Not only that, the previously selected selected music can be efficiently selected with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21, and the selected music can be output from the speaker 26.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the tentatively selected music image 832 is displayed between the selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833 in the music selection image 83, and the selected image is displayed in the tentatively selected music image 832. Both 831 and the unselected image 833 are displayed adjacent to each other. Therefore, the player changes the tentatively selected music image 832 in the music selection image 832 by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 to select a previously selected music or a previously selected music. Regardless of which of the unselected songs that have never been selected, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. As a result, the game machine 10 corresponds to various types of players, such as a player who tends to repeatedly select a selected song and a player who tends to select an unselected song, and for those players. The target music can be selected with a small number of operations.

Returning to FIG. 25, the unselected music image 833 is an image showing that the music is a music other than the selected music. In the example of FIG. 25, music K, music L, music M, music I, music B, and music C are unselected songs. The unselected music image 833 is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the selected music image 831 and the tentatively selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 includes a non-selected music image 834 indicating that the music is a non-selected music. The non-selected music is a music that is not selected by the player even though it is first displayed as the provisionally selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, the music I, the music B, and the music C are non-selected music. The non-selected music image 834 is the unselected music image 833, for example, depending on the color, size, shape, etc. of the effect around the contour portion, in addition to the color, pattern, and pattern of the contour portion such as the frame, the character portion, and the character background portion. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed distinguishably. In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (character "dislike" in the present embodiment) is attached to the side of the non-selected music image 834, making it easy to distinguish the non-selected music image 834. However, the non-selected music image 834 may be distinguished by the predetermined mark as long as it can be distinguished, or may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark, and there are restrictions on the display mode. Absent.

Further, an upper limit is set in advance for the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 is 3. The upper limit of the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 may be other than 3 as in the selected music image 831. Further, when the number of non-selected songs is less than the upper limit, for example, when the number of non-selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of non-selected music images 834 corresponding to the number of non-selected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of non-selected music is 0, or when the player has set not to display the non-selected music image 834 as described later (step S4013 of the music list display setting process of FIG. 63, or When the non-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to on in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71), the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed. When the non-selected music image 834 is displayed and the number of non-selected music does not reach the upper limit, the unselected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 is displayed for the shortage. In this way, even when the number of unselected music images 834 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 does not reach the upper limit, the unselected music other than the non-selected music image 834 is replaced with the non-selected music image 834. By displaying the image 833, a predetermined number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or deficiency.

The selection determination unit image 84 is an image that imitates the selection determination unit 21, and shows that the provisional selection music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The operation explanation image 85 explains that the tentatively selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, and can be determined as a music to be output from the speaker 26 by operating the enter button 21B. It is a thing. The lyrics telop image 86 displays the lyrics of the tentatively selected music or the music selected by the player output from the speaker 26 in accordance with the output of the music. However, the selection determination unit image 84, the operation explanation image 85, and the lyrics telop image 86 are not essential images, and all or part of them may be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the case where the music is selected by the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 has been described as an example, but in addition to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213 and the right selection button The music may be selected by using 214. For example, the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are used to select a song from unselected songs, and the left selection button 213 and the right selection button 214 are used to select a song from the selected songs. May be good. In this case, for example, by operating the upper selection button 211, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain the same, the unselected music image 833 is scrolled upward, and by operating the lower selection button 212, it is not yet selected. The selected music image 833 is scrolled downward, and the music selection image 83 moved to the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 is changed from the unselected music image 833 to the tentatively selected music image 832. On the other hand, by operating the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move upward or downward, and the music selection image 83 for the selected music becomes the provisional selection music image 832. It may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display position of the selected music image 831 is predetermined, but as shown in FIG. 28, for example, the selected music image 831 is not displayed by the operation of the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. It may be scrolled upward A1 or downward A2 together with the selected music image 833. By doing so, as compared with the case where the provisionally selected music is changed by the method described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the selected music and the unselected music are not used properly without using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 properly. Since a song can be provisionally selected from any of the selected songs, the operability when temporarily selecting the song is improved. As shown in FIG. 28, even when the selected music image 831 is scrolled together with the unselected music image 833 in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2 by the operation of the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, first. In the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is preferable that the non-selected music (non-selection image 834) is arranged at the position farthest from the initial provisional music image 832 (initial provisional music).

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2301, the MPU 51 creates a selected music list in order to display the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 also creates a non-selected music list (step S2302). The selected music list and the non-selected music list are referred to when creating the initial arrangement order data table (see FIG. 31) for the music selection image 83 described later, and are stored in the RAM 512 shown in FIG. 29, for example. It can be created from the music selection counter data table.

Here, FIG. 29 is an example of a music selection counter data table for a plurality of music that can be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game production. As shown in FIG. 29, the music selection counter data table includes a selection count counter, history data related to selected music, and history data related to non-selected music. Further, in the music selection counter data table, the music in which the selected flag is set to off is the data related to the unselected music, and the data in which the non-selected flag is set to on is the non-selected music. Data about. This music selection counter data table is updated by the music selection counter data update process of FIG. 39, which will be described later. Details regarding the update of the music selection counter data table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

The selection count counter is selected by the player as a song to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game production from a predetermined starting point (for example, when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned on) to the present for 20 songs of the songs A to T. It indicates the number of selections made. In the present embodiment, the music ranking of the selected music is determined based on the selection date and time, but when the music ranking of the selected music is determined by the selection frequency, the music ranking is determined with reference to the selection count counter. ..

The history data related to the selected music consists of music ranking data and selected flags for each of the music A to the music T.

The music ranking data specifies the display position of the selected music image 831, and the youngest ranking is assigned in the order of the latest selected date and time, and the display ranking is raised. Specifically, as for the display order of the selected songs, the order of 1st to 3rd is assigned to the top 3 songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, "1", "2", or "3" is described according to the display order, and "0" is described without the order. That is, as for the display order of the selected music, the first place is the music A, the second place is the music J, the third place is the music D, and the remaining music other than the music A, the music J and the music D has no ranking. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs (a state in which no song selection is performed), all songs are considered to have no ranking. In addition, when there are two songs corresponding to the top three songs, only the first and second places are determined without determining the third place, and similarly, when the songs corresponding to the top three songs are one song, Only the 1st place is decided without deciding the 2nd and 3rd place.

The selected flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display as the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 is assigned one of the first to third display ranks in the music selection counter data update process of FIG. 39, which will be described later, and decides to set the selected flag to on for the music, and the display rank is set. It is decided to set the selected flag to off for the music without. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data related to the selected music in the music selection counter data table, and displays it as the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. 30A according to the music ranking data. Create a list of selected songs.

On the other hand, the history data related to the non-selected music includes music ranking data and a non-selection flag for each of the music A to the music T.

The music ranking data specifies the display position of the non-selected music image 834, and the youngest ranking is assigned in the order of the latest date and time that was not selected most recently, and the display ranking is raised. As for the display order of the non-selected songs, the first to third ranks are assigned to the top three songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, the display order of the non-selected music is that the first place is music C, the second place is music B, and the third place is music I, and the remaining music other than music C, music B, and music I. Is unranked. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs, all songs are considered to have no ranking. In addition, when there are two songs corresponding to the top three songs, only the first and second places are determined without determining the third place, and similarly, when the songs corresponding to the top three songs are one song, Only the 1st place is decided without deciding the 2nd and 3rd place.

The non-selection flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the music selection image 83 as the non-selection music image 834. The MPU 51 is assigned one of the first to third display ranks in the music selection counter data update process of FIG. 39, which will be described later, and decides to set the non-selection flag to on for the music, and the display rank is set. It is decided to set the selected flag to off for the music without. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data related to the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table, and displays it as the non-selected music image 834 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. 30B according to the music ranking data. Create a non-selected song list.

The MPU 51 may assign the youngest ranks in the historical data related to the selected songs and the non-selected songs in descending order of the selection frequency (for example, the cumulative number of selections or the selection rate from the latest to a predetermined number (for example, 10 times)). The display order may be another number of songs without limiting the number to three songs as in the illustrated example. For example, priority may be assigned to all songs.

<Step S2303>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2303, the MPU 51 determines the tentatively selected music (initial tentatively selected music) when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after shifting to the jackpot game. Executes the selected music determination process. Details of the initial provisional selection music determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the initial tentatively selected music determination process of step S2303 is completed, the MPU 51 stores the initial tentatively selected music determined in step S2303 in the RAM 512 (step S2304), and executes the initial music selection image display process (step S2305). The initial tentatively selected music stored in step S2304 is referred to when determining whether or not the initial tentatively selected music is selected in step S3202 in the music selection counter data update process of FIG. 50, which will be described later. Further, in the initial music selection image display process of step S2305, the MPU 51 determines the initial arrangement for a plurality of music pieces, and transmits the initial arrangement order data regarding the initial arrangement to the symbol display unit 341. The initial arrangement is determined based on, for example, the selected music list table shown in FIG. 30 (A), the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30 (B), and the initial provisional music determined in step S2303 of FIG. To.

Here, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an initial arrangement order data table regarding the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs for displaying the music selection image 83, and FIG. 32 is an example of the initial arrangement of the music selection image 83. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 31, the initial sequence rank data table is a table of the initial sequence rank data, and includes the sequence rank data related to the initial sequence rank and additional data.

The arrangement order data defines the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs A to T. The initial arrangement order is from 1st to 20th, 1st to 3rd are assigned to selected songs, and 11th to 13th are assigned to non-selected songs. Specifically, the 1st to 3rd places of the initial arrangement order are assigned to the 3rd, 2nd and 1st place of the selected music list ranking in the selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, respectively. .. According to the order of the selected music list table shown in FIG. 30 (A), music D, music J, and music A are assigned to the first to third places of the initial arrangement order, respectively. Further, the 11th to 13th positions of the initial arrangement order are assigned to the 1st, 2nd and 3rd positions of the non-selected music order in the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30 (B), respectively. According to the order of the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30 (B), music I, music B, and music C are assigned to the 11th to 13th places of the initial arrangement order, respectively. In addition, the 4th place in the initial arrangement order is assigned to the provisionally selected music. In the example shown in FIG. 31, it is shown that the music P is determined as the tentatively selected music in step S2303 of FIG. Further, the 5th to 10th positions and the 14th to 20th positions of the initial arrangement order are assigned to unselected songs other than the non-selected songs. Then, the unselected songs other than the non-selected songs are assigned in ascending order of the song number to the youngest order among the 5th to 10th place and the 14th to 20th place. In the example shown in FIG. 31, music E is in 5th place in music ranking, music F is in 6th place in music ranking, music G is in 7th place in music ranking, music H is in 8th place in music ranking, and music K is in music ranking. Song L is ranked 9th, song L is ranked 10th, song M is ranked 14th, song N is ranked 15th, song O is ranked 16th, and song Q is ranked 16th. The music R is assigned to the 17th place in the music ranking, the music R is assigned to the 18th place in the music ranking, the music S is assigned to the 19th place in the music ranking, and the music T is assigned to the 20th place in the music ranking.

On the other hand, the additional data includes music type data indicating which of the selected music, the provisionally selected music, the non-selected music, and the unselected music other than the non-selected music, and the non-display setting for the selected music and the non-selected music. Contains data indicating whether the flag is set to on or off. Here, the non-display setting flag for the selected music and the non-selected music has the same display mode as the unselected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 for each of the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834. A flag that is set to on when displaying is set by the player. In the present embodiment, the non-display setting flag includes the selected music image non-display setting flag that displays the selected music image 831 in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833, and the non-selected music image 834. It includes a non-selected music image non-display setting flag to be displayed in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833 other than 834. The selected music image non-display setting flag and the non-selected music image non-display setting flag are set in step S4013 of the music list display setting screen processing shown in FIG. 63, which will be described later, or step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing shown in FIG. 71. Is set to on.

In the example of FIG. 31, in the MPU 51, the music A, the music J, and the music D are selected music, the non-display flag for the selected music is set to off, and the music M, based on the additional data. It can be specified that the music I and the music B are non-selected songs, that the non-display flag for the selected music is set to off, and that the music P is a tentatively selected music.

Then, according to the initial arrangement order shown in FIG. 31, the initial arrangements for the plurality of songs are in the order shown in FIG. 32, and on the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 33. It is displayed in various modes. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of music selection images 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 is 10, the music selection images 83 for the first to tenth music in the initial arrangement order are displayed. To. Further, since the non-display flag for the selected music is set to off, the music selection image 83 is displayed as including the selected music image 831. The non-selected songs are initially arranged at the position farthest from the tentatively selected songs because the initial arrangement order is assigned to the 11th to 13th positions. That is, when creating the initial arrangement order data, the MPU 51 arranges the non-selected music at the position where the minimum number of operations for the selection button 21A required to make the non-selected music a temporary selection music is the largest. Further, the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the non-selected music is not displayed when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the player operates the lower selection button 212 to perform the unselected music. The image 833 is displayed by scrolling.

In the present embodiment, the selected songs are assigned to the 1st to 3rd places in the initial arrangement order, and the non-selected songs are assigned to the 11th to 13th places in the initial arrangement order, but the upper limit is not necessarily the case. It is not necessary to collect the maximum number of selected songs in one place, and similarly, it is not necessary to collect the maximum number of non-selected songs in one place. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, the maximum number of selected songs are discrete. The maximum number of non-selected songs may be discretely assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 34, a plurality of songs are arranged with the song numbers as they are, and the initial arrangement of the plurality of songs is determined so that the initial arrangement order of the songs P determined as the provisionally selected songs is the fourth. Has been done.

<Step S2306>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2306, the MPU 51 sets the music selection processing flag to on, and ends the music selection image display processing. For example, the music selection processing flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to continue the music selection processing (step S2219 in the jackpot game production processing in FIG. 23) and whether or not the music selection validity period has elapsed (FIG. Step S2608 in the music selection process of 39).

[Initial provisional music determination process]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisional music selection process (step S2303 in FIG. 24). In the initial tentatively selected music determination process, the initial tentatively selected music corresponding to the initial tentatively selected music image 832 to be displayed first as the tentatively selected music image 832 of the music selection image 83 is based on the value acquired from the tentatively selected music lottery counter. decide.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
The MPU 51 acquires the value of the initial provisional music lottery counter for selecting the initial provisional music lottery (step S2401), refers to the provisional selection music lottery table, and corresponds to the value of the provisional selection music lottery counter acquired in step S2401. The song to be played is tentatively determined as the initial provisionally selected song (step S2402).

Here, FIG. 36 is an example of a tentatively selected music lottery table. As shown in FIG. 36, the tentatively selected music lottery table corresponds the values of the tentatively selected music lottery counters with the music A to the music T. For example, in the MPU 51, when the value of the acquired initial provisional music lottery counter is "0", the music A is provisionally determined as the initial provisional music, and the value of the acquired initial provisional music lottery counter is "88". If the value is, the music I is tentatively determined as the initial tentatively selected music, and if the value of the acquired initial tentatively selected music lottery counter is "155", the music P is tentatively determined as the initial tentatively selected music.

<Steps S2403 and S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music tentatively determined as the initial tentatively selected music is a selected music or a non-selected music (disliked music), that is, whether or not it is an unselected music. If the tentatively determined song is a selected song or a non-selected song (if it is not an unselected song) (step S2403: Yes), the initial tentatively selected song is not determined. The decision process ends. That is, in the next sub-timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes the initial temporary selection music determination process again and tries to determine the initial temporary selection music. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines the tentatively determined song in step S2402 as the initial tentatively selected song when the tentatively determined song is not a selected song or a non-selected song (when it is an unselected song) (step S2403: No). (Step S2404), the initial provisional music determination process is terminated. For example, whether or not the music is selected or non-selected can be determined by referring to the music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) and determining whether or not the selected or non-selected flag is set to ON. In the example of FIG. 29, when the music tentatively determined by the lottery in step S2402 is music A, music D or music J, it is determined to be a selected music, and the tentatively determined music is music B and music. If it is C or music I, it is judged to be a non-selected music. As a result, until a song other than the selected song (song A, song D and song J) and the non-selected song (song B, song C and song I) is determined as the initial provisional song (step S2403: No). The initial provisional music determination process is repeated.

By the way, the selected music is a music that the player has listened to before by the selection by the player, and the non-selected music is a music that the player has heard before by being output as an initial provisional music. Is. When the initial tentatively selected music is determined from the selected music or the non-selected music, the music that the player has listened to before is output, so that the chance of letting the player listen to the unselected music is reduced. In addition, the non-selected music is a music that the player has not selected before, and if such a music is output again as the initial provisional music, the player may feel disgusted and the jackpot game is sufficiently performed. Can't entertain.

On the other hand, in step S2403, the lottery of the initial tentatively selected music is performed until a music other than the selected music and the non-selected music is selected. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can hear the unselected song. You can secure an opportunity to convey. Further, the player has trouble in that a song that has been previously selected as a tentatively selected song in step S2404 but has not been selected by the player is selected again in step S2404 and displayed as a tentatively selected song image 832. You will be released from the music.

When the selected music image 831 is set to be hidden by the player (step S4013 in the music list display setting screen processing of FIG. 63 or step S4413 in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71). When the non-display setting flag is set to on), the initial tentatively selected music may be selected from the music including the selected music. Similarly, when the non-selection music image 834 is set to be hidden by the player, the music including the non-selection music may be selected as the initial provisional music. That is, the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 may not be selected as the initial provisional music only when those images 831,834 are displayed as the music selection image 83. ..

[Initial provisional music output processing]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisional music output processing (step S2210 in FIG. 23). In the initial temporary selection music output processing, when the temporary selection music image 832 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after shifting to the jackpot game, the initial temporary selection music corresponding to the initial temporary selection music image 832 is output from the speaker 26. It is a process. In this initial temporary selection music output processing, the initial temporary selection music is usually output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern set by default. The melody pattern defines an output start portion when the music is output from the speaker 26.

Here, FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table in which the default setting of the melody pattern is set for each of the tentatively selected music and the selected music for each of the plurality of music (music A to T). In the example of the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern 1 and the melody pattern 2 are defined as the melody patterns. The basic unit of the melody pattern 1 is "A melody (singing part)-> B melody-> chorus part", and the output of the music is started from the A melody (singing part), and the basic unit is repeatedly output. That is, in the case of melody pattern 1, "A melody (singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (singing part) → ..." It becomes. It should be noted that the basic unit of the melody pattern 1 may include an intro part (prelude part), that is, "intro part (prelude part)-> verse (singing part)-> B melody-> chorus part". Be done. In this case, the output start of the melody pattern 1 is not the verse (singing part) but the intro part. The basic unit of the melody pattern 2 is "chorus part-> verse (singing part)-> B melody", the output of the music is started from the chorus part, and the basic unit is repeatedly output as in the melody pattern 1. Further, in the tentatively selected music including the initial tentatively selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that all of the music A to the music T are set to the melody pattern 2, that is, the output start from the chorus portion. In the tentatively selected music, the default setting for all the music A to T is the melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all the music may be the melody pattern 1. The default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music will be described later in the selected music output process of FIG. 41.

Then, in the present embodiment, regarding the output of the tentatively selected music including the initial tentatively selected music, the player can set a melody pattern different from the default setting by the player as described later (the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 61). , Or the melody pattern setting history screen processing in FIG. 69), when a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial provisional music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player. The default.

Furthermore, in the initial provisional selection music output processing, when the promotion effect flag is set to on (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), the melody pattern can be randomly selected. , Can cause contradictions regarding the melody pattern of the initial tentatively selected song. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start part of the initial provisional music is the chorus part, the output start of the initial provisional music is started when the promotion effect flag is set to on. The part may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or verse part (singing part)). Randomly selecting a melody pattern has the same meaning as performing a contradiction output lottery (step S2804 of the selected music output process of FIG. 41 described later).

When an output contradiction (a melody pattern contradiction) occurs at the output start portion of the initial tentatively selected song in this way, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output as the initial tentatively selected song. It is determined that the result is more favorable to the player than the previously suggested result. Therefore, when a player has an output contradiction (a melody pattern contradiction) at the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected song, for example, the current game state is a 5R normal jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than the game state. It can be known that it is either a gaming state or a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, or a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is no one that causes a contradiction in the melody pattern when the initial provisionally selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional game machine cannot make the player interested in the production in which the initial provisionally selected music is output. On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect is executed by the definite effect that the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music is inconsistent. Therefore, the player can confirm whether or not the final effect is executed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected song, so that even if the effect is not of interest to the player with the conventional game machine, the effect can be confirmed. Since the production can be focused on, the player can enjoy the jackpot game production. On the other hand, since it is determined by randomly selecting the melody pattern whether or not the melody pattern contradiction occurs, there is a possibility that the promotion effect is executed even if the melody pattern contradiction does not occur. Therefore, even if there is no contradiction in the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music, the promotion effect may be executed after the output of the provisionally selected music, so that the player executes the promotion effect after the output of the provisionally selected music. You can enjoy the jackpot game while expecting that.

The initial provisional music output processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 37.

<Step S2501>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag, which are set to be on in step S2003 of FIG. 19, is set to on. To do. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2507 when the promotion effect flag is set to on (step S2501: Yes), and steps the process when the promotion effect flag is set to off (step S2501: No). Move to S2502.

<Steps S2502 to S2506>
When the promotion effect flag is set to off (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the provisionally selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or S4313 of FIG. 69 is set to on. (Step S2502).

Here, in the MPU 51, when the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag is off (step S2502: No), that is, when the melody pattern is not set by the player, the melody pattern 2 of the default setting for the tentatively selected music is set. (See FIG. 38) is selected (step S2503), the speaker 26 is made to output the initial tentatively selected music from the chorus portion (step S2504), and the initial tentatively selected music output process is completed.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 has a melody pattern 1 (step S2502: Yes) that is different from the default setting for the tentatively selected song when the tentatively selected melody pattern flag is turned on (step S2502: Yes), that is, when the melody pattern is set by the player. (See FIG. 38) is selected (step S2505), the initial tentatively selected music is output from the verse (singing portion) to the speaker 26 (step S2506), and the initial tentatively selected music output process is completed.

<Step S2507>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 has a melody pattern from a plurality of predetermined melody patterns (two in the present embodiment) for outputting the initial provisionally selected music from the speaker 26. Is randomly selected (step S2507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the melody pattern (output start portion) is inconsistent when the promotion effect is planned, and the melody pattern of the tentatively selected song is different from the default setting depending on the player. Regardless of whether or not it is set to, it is determined by a random lottery of the melody pattern. As a result, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music determined in step S2507 is the melody pattern 1. When the melody pattern 1 is selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisional music from the verse (singing portion) (step S2506), and performs the initial provisional music output processing. finish. On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected (step S2508: No), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisional music from the chorus portion (step S2504), and ends the initial provisional music output processing.

In the initial provisional music output process of FIG. 37, the melody pattern is randomly selected (step S2507) on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), but the melody. Instead of randomly selecting the pattern, whether to perform an output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) at the output start portion of the initial tentatively selected music of the melody pattern as in step S2804 in the selected music output processing of FIG. The lottery may be held.

[Music selection process]
Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection process (step S2220 of FIG. 23). In the music selection process, the player is made to select the music to be output in the jackpot game, and when the music is selected by the player, processing such as output of the selected music is executed.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the upper selection button 211 has been operated based on the upper selection button operation data (see FIG. 18B).

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602 when the upper selection button 211 is operated (step S2601: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2603 when the upper selection button 211 is not operated (step S2601: No). To do.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 executes a cursor movement display process for moving the cursor image 836 indicating that it is a provisionally selected song upward. For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in the initial music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the cursor image 836 and the indicator image 835 (marks with the characters “temporary”) are the music P as shown in FIG. 27 (A). Move to the next higher song A. As a result, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the selected music image 831 to the provisionally selected music image 832. When the MPU 51 finishes the cursor movement display process, the process shifts to step S2605.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated based on the lower selection button operation data (see FIG. 18C).

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2604 when the lower selection button 212 is operated (step S2603: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2606 when the lower selection button 212 is not operated (step S2603: No). To do.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 executes an unselected music image moving display process for moving the unselected music image 833 downward. For example, when the lower selection button 212 is operated in the music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 51 moves the unselected music image 833 for the music E, the music F, the music G, the music H, and the music K downward. .. At this time, while the unselected music image 833 for the music L is deleted, the music selection image 83 for the music T is newly displayed as the temporary music image 832, so that the temporary music is changed from the music P to the music T. Be changed.

In this way, the player can change the tentatively selected music to the selected music by operating the upper selection button 211, and can select the tentatively selected music from the unselected music by operating the lower selection button 212. Therefore, as described above, the player changes the tentatively selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83 by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212, so that the player has previously selected the selected music. , And any of the unselected songs that have not been selected before, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 executes a temporary selection music output process for outputting the temporary selection music from the speaker 26, and ends the music selection process. The details of the provisionally selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated based on the decision button operation data (see FIG. 18F). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated by determining whether or not the operation for the decision button 21B has been started depending on whether or not the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. to decide. When the decision button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2607, and when the decision button 21B is not operated (step S2606: No), the process shifts to step S2610.

<Steps S2607 to S2609>
When the decision button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the decision operation counter (step S2607). Whether or not the determination operation counter is the first music determination in the music selection valid period of the jackpot game (for example, the period during which the opening / closing execution mode of the first R is executed) in step S2802 in the selected music output process of FIG. 41 described later. It is referred to when judging. Further, the MPU 51 executes a selected music output process for outputting the music selected by the player from the speaker 26 (step S2608), and executes a music selection button effect in response to an operation on the decision button 21B at the time of selection. The process is executed (step S2609). The details of the selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. The details of the music selection button effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection validity period has elapsed. When the music selection valid period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2611. On the other hand, when the music selection valid period has not elapsed (step S2610: No), the MPU 51 ends the music selection process. That is, until the music selection valid period elapses, the music selection processing flag set to be on in step S2306 in the music selection image display process of FIG. 24 is not set to off (step S2612), so that the music selection is valid. During the period, it is repeatedly determined whether or not the decision button 21B in step S2606 is operated. In other words, it is possible to select a song (change the selected song) multiple times during the song selection validity period. Further, during this music selection valid period, the music selection is enabled by the operation of the enter button 21B. Therefore, the music selection button effect (expectation suggestion effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect)) is performed by the music selection button effect process of FIG. 42 described later. 8) It is also a period during which the probabilistic change definite effect (confirmed effect 1 to definite effect 4) and the reserved consecutive villa definite effect (confirmed effect 2 and definite effect 4) can be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timings of the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are limited within the music selection valid period. By limiting the execution timing of the song selection button effect in this way, it is possible to prevent the decision button 21B from being unnecessarily operated to confirm whether the song selection button effect is executed.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the music selection validity period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a music selection counter data update process for updating data based on the music selection by the player in order to display the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. At the same time (step S2611), the music selection processing flag is set to off (step S2612), and the music selection process ends. The details of the music selection counter data update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Temporary music output processing]
Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the provisionally selected music output process (step S2605 of FIG. 39). In the temporary selection music output processing, when the temporary selection music is changed by the operation of the player with respect to the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, the processing of outputting the temporary selection music from the speaker 26 is executed. In this temporary selection music output processing, the temporary selection music is usually output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern set by default. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when the temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26 as described above (see FIG. 38), and the melody differs from the default setting depending on the player. The pattern can be set (the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 61 or the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69). When the melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player.

In addition, the promotion effect flag is set to on (promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), and the melody pattern is randomly selected when the tentatively selected song is an unselected song. So, there can be a contradiction regarding the melody pattern. For example, when the melody pattern is set to the default, if the output start part of the provisionally selected song is the chorus part, the promotion effect flag is set to on, and the temporarily selected song is an unselected song. , The output start part of the temporarily selected music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, the music start part (intro part (prelude part) or verse part (singing part)). It should be noted that randomly selecting the melody pattern has the same meaning as performing a contradiction output lottery (step S2803 of the selected music output process of FIG. 41 described later).

When an output contradiction (a melody pattern contradiction) occurs at the output start portion of the tentatively selected song in this way, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is before the tentatively selected song is output. It is determined that the result is more favorable to the player than the suggested result. Therefore, when the output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) of the output start portion of the provisionally selected music occurs, the player, for example, has a 5R probability variation jackpot game in which the current game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It can be known that it is either a state or a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, or a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is no one that causes a contradiction in the melody pattern when the provisionally selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional game machine has not been able to make the player sufficiently interested in the act of tentatively selecting the music and the effect of outputting the tentatively selected music, and as a result, the player tentatively selects the music. It may not even change the song from the initial provisional song.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect is executed by the definite effect that the melody pattern of the provisionally selected music is inconsistent. Therefore, the player performs the act of tentatively selecting a song, and at that time, by paying attention to the melody pattern of the tentatively selected song, it is possible to confirm whether the final effect is executed, so that the conventional game machine can fully enjoy it. You can fully enjoy the act of temporarily selecting a song that you couldn't do. Not only that, even if the production is not of interest to the player with the conventional game machine, the production can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by generating a contradiction in the melody pattern on the condition that the tentatively selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to positively perform the act of tentatively selecting the song. Unselected songs can be positively tentatively selected. As a result, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs.

The tentatively selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 40.

<Step S2701>
In step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag, which are set to be on in step S2003 of FIG. 19, is set to on. To do.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2702 when the promotion effect flag is set to on (step S2701: Yes), and when the promotion effect flag is set to off (step S2701: No). The process proceeds to step S2703.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the unselected music has been tentatively selected. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2703 when the unselected song is tentatively selected (step S2702: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2708 when the unselected song is not tentatively selected (step S2702: No). To do.

<Steps S2703 to S2707>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines whether the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 and S4313 of FIG. 69 is set to ON.

Here, in the MPU 51, when the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag is off (step S2703: No), that is, when the melody pattern is not set by the player, the melody pattern 2 of the default setting for the tentatively selected music is set. (See FIG. 38) is selected (step S2704), the tentatively selected music is output from the chorus portion to the speaker 26 (step S2705), and the initial tentatively selected music output process is completed.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 has a melody pattern 1 (FIG.) different from the default setting when the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag is on (step S2703: Yes), that is, when the melody pattern is set by the player. 38) is selected (step S2506), the verse 26 is made to output the tentatively selected music from the verse portion (singing portion) (step S2707), and the initial tentative music output process is completed.

<Step S2708>
When the promotion effect flag is set to on (step S2701: Yes) and the tentatively selected song is an unselected song (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 is predetermined to output the tentatively selected song from the speaker 26. A melody pattern is randomly selected from a plurality of melody patterns (two in this embodiment) (step S2708). That is, when the MPU 51 is scheduled to perform the promotion effect, the player temporarily decides whether to cause a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) on the condition that the unselected music is temporarily selected. Regardless of whether the melody pattern of the selected song is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting, it is determined by a random lottery of the melody pattern. As a result, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

In the tentatively selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, the melody pattern is randomly selected on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to on and the unselected music is tentatively selected (step S2701: Yes and step S2702: Yes). (Step S2708), but instead of randomly selecting the melody pattern, a lottery is performed to determine whether to perform an output contradiction (a melody pattern contradiction) at the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected song of the melody pattern. You may do so. Further, in the present embodiment, when an unselected song is selected, the melody pattern is randomly drawn regardless of whether or not the tentatively selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to on by the player. When the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to on, the player setting may be prioritized and the tentatively selected music may be output with a melody pattern different from the default setting. That is, in the non-default state in which the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to on, the output contradiction of the tentatively selected music is prevented from occurring, and the melody is melody only in the default state in which the player setting for the melody pattern is not made. Pattern inconsistencies may occur. On the contrary, in the non-default state where the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to on, the output contradiction of the tentatively selected music occurs, and in the default state where the player setting for the melody pattern is not made. The melody pattern may not be inconsistent.

Further, in the tentatively selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, the melody pattern is randomly selected each time the unselected music is tentatively selected, but an upper limit may be set for the number of times the melody pattern is randomly selected. There is no particular limitation on the maximum number, but it is, for example, about 1 to 5 times. By setting an upper limit on the number of times that the melody pattern is randomly selected in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly temporarily selecting the unselected music. Further, in the tentatively selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, a contradiction may occur in the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music on the condition that the unselected music is tentatively selected. The pattern may be inconsistent. For example, a contradiction may occur in the melody pattern on condition that the selected music is tentatively selected. Further, even if either the selected music or the unselected music is provisionally selected, the melody pattern may be inconsistent. In this way, even when a player who does not know the conditions under which the melody pattern of the tentatively selected song on the game machine 10 is inconsistent plays a game, the melody pattern of the tentatively selected song can be inconsistent. Because it can be done, the interest of the jackpot game is improved.

[Selected music output processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process (step S2609 of FIG. 39). In the selected music output process, when a music is selected by a determination operation on the determination button 21B by the player, a process of outputting the selected music from the speaker 26 is executed. In this music output processing, the selected music is usually output from the speaker 26 with the default melody pattern. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when the music is output from the speaker 26 as described above, and the selected music is individually selected for each of the selected music and the unselected music. Default settings are set. In the selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that all of the music A to the music T are set to output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the verse (singing portion). In the unselected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that all of the music A to the music T are set to the melody pattern 2, that is, the output start from the chorus portion. In the selected music, the default setting for all the music A to T is the melody pattern 1, but the default setting for some or all the music may be the melody pattern 2. For unselected songs, the default setting for all songs A to T is melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all songs may be melody pattern 1.

Further, as for the melody pattern of the selected music, the melody pattern different from the default setting can be set by the player for each of the selected music and the unselected music (the melody pattern setting screen processing of FIG. 61, or FIG. 69 melody pattern setting history screen processing). When the melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player. For example, if the selected song is a selected song, output is started from a melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, and if the selected song is an unselected song, output is started from a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting. ..

Further, in the selected music output process, when the selected music is an unselected music in the first music selection in the music selection valid period (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of the first round) and the promotion effect flag is set to ON. In addition (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), by performing a contradiction output lottery, the melody pattern can be randomly selected to cause a contradiction regarding the melody pattern. For example, when the melody pattern is set to the default, if the output start part of the selected song is the chorus part, the promotion effect flag is set to on, and if the selected song is an unselected song, it is selected. The output start part of the music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, the music start part (intro part (prelude part) or verse part (singing part)). It should be noted that performing the inconsistent output lottery has the same meaning as randomly selecting a melody pattern (step S2507 of the initial provisional music output processing of FIG. 37 and step S2708 of the provisional music output processing of FIG. 40).

When the output contradiction (the melody pattern contradiction) of the output start part of the selected music occurs in this way, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is suggested before the selected music is output. It is determined that the result is more favorable to the player than the result. Therefore, when the output contradiction (the melody pattern contradiction) of the output start portion of the selected music occurs, the player, for example, has a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state in which the current gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state. It can be known that it is either the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there is no one that causes a contradiction in the melody pattern when the selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional game machine has not been able to make the player sufficiently interested in the act of selecting a musical piece and the production in which the selected musical piece is output, and as a result, the player even selects the musical piece. It may not be done.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect is executed by the definite effect that the melody pattern of the selected music is inconsistent. Therefore, the player performs the act of selecting a song, and at that time, by paying attention to the melody pattern of the selected song, it is possible to confirm whether the final effect is executed, so that the conventional game machine can be fully enjoyed. You can fully enjoy the act of selecting songs that you couldn't do. Not only that, even if the production is not of interest to the player with the conventional game machine, the production can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by causing a melody pattern contradiction on the condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of selecting the song, and the player is not selected. It is possible to positively tentatively select a song. This can give the player a motivation to listen to the unselected music, and can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player.

The selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 41.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected music selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is an unselected music. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2802 when the selected music is an unselected music (step S2801: Yes), and when the selected music is not an unselected music, that is, when the selected music is a selected music (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2810.

<Step S2802>
In step S2802, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music is determined for the first time in the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 of FIG. 39), which is added by 1 by the music determination operation for the determination button 21B, is 1.

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2803 when it is the first music determination (step S2802: Yes), and when it is not the first music determination, that is, when it is the second and subsequent music determination (step S2802). : No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag set on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to on. .. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2804 when any of the promotion effect flags is set to on (S2803: Yes), and when any of the promotion effect flags is not set to on (step S2803: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 performs a contradiction output lottery. Inconsistent output means that when the melody pattern is set by default, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern different from the default setting, and the melody pattern is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Means that the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the default setting melody pattern. In the present embodiment, the inconsistent output lottery is executed by selecting an unselected song when any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2801 and step S2803: Yes). ). Therefore, the player may have a contradiction in the output of the music when the unselected music is selected. For example, the current gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state, and the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R. It is possible to know that it is one of the probabilistic jackpot gaming states, or that it is a 16R probabilistic jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probabilistic jackpot gaming state. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting an unselected song can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a song, but as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in a jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can be motivated to positively select the unselected music and listen to the unselected music, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

Further, by limiting the contradiction output lottery to only the first music determination (step S2802: Yes), the player unnecessarily repeatedly unselected music for the purpose of executing the music selection button effect in the jackpot game state. Can be suppressed from selecting. The number of times the inconsistent output lottery is performed in step S2802 is not limited to one per jackpot game, and may be performed twice or more. However, it is preferable to set an upper limit for the number of inconsistent output lottery per jackpot game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessary repeated selection of unselected songs.

In step S2804, the inconsistent output lottery is that an unselected song is selected (step S2801: Yes), that it is the first song determination (step S2802: Yes), and that the first to third promotion production flags are used. Is executed on the condition that one of the above is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but the fact that an unselected song is selected and that it is the first song determination is a contradiction output lottery. Conditions can also be excluded. That is, the inconsistent output lottery may be performed on the condition that any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON. In this case, the inconsistent output is a probability change from a 5R normal jackpot to a 5R probability variation jackpot. It has significance as a production that clearly shows that the player is in an advantageous state of promotion, 16R promotion from 5R probability variation jackpot to 16R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation promotion from 5R normal jackpot to 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, by making it a condition of the inconsistent output lottery that the unselected music is selected, the player who wants to confirm that the inconsistent output is in an advantageous state will select the unselected music, so that the player You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs. On the other hand, by setting the condition of the inconsistent output lottery that it is the first music determination, it is necessary to select the music unnecessarily to confirm whether the inconsistent output is executed without fully listening to the selected music. It can be suppressed from being repeated.

<Step S2805>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the inconsistent output lottery has been won, and if it wins (step S2805: Yes), the process shifts to step S2806 and if it is not won (step S2805: No), The process proceeds to step S2809.

<Steps S2806 to S2808>
When the inconsistent output lottery is won (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 is set to the unselected music melody pattern setting flag set to be turned on in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or step S4313 of FIG. 69 in step S2806. Judge whether or not. When the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2806: Yes), that is, when the MPU 51 is set to a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38). , Select the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting to execute the inconsistent output (step S2807). On the other hand, the MPU 51 executes inconsistent output when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2806: No), that is, when the default setting melody pattern 2 is set (see FIG. 38). A melody pattern 1 different from the default setting is selected (step S2808).

<Step S2809>
When the selected music is an unselected music (step S2801: Yes), when it is not the first music determination (when the music is determined after the second time) (step S2802: No), or the first to third promotion effects If none of the flags are set to on (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 in step S2809 sets the unselected music melody pattern setting flag to on without executing the inconsistent output lottery (step S2804). Judge whether or not. Further, in step S2809, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON even when the inconsistent output lottery is not won (step S2805: No). When the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), that is, when the MPU 51 is set to a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38). , Select the melody pattern 1 to output the selected music from the verse (singing portion) without executing the inconsistent output (step S2808). On the other hand, the MPU 51 executes inconsistent output when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2809: No), that is, when the default setting melody pattern 2 is set (see FIG. 38). Instead, the melody pattern 2 of the default setting to be output from the chorus part of the selected music is selected (step S2807).

<Step S2810>
When the selected song is not an unselected song (when the selected song is a selected song) (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 is set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or step S4313 of FIG. 69 in step S2810. Determines if the melody pattern setting flag is set to on. When the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2810: Yes), that is, when the MPU 51 is set to a melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, the MPU 51 does not execute the inconsistent output and selects the selected music. The melody pattern 2 to be output from the chorus portion of is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2809: No), that is, when the MPU 51 is set to the default setting melody pattern, the MPU 51 does not execute the inconsistent output and of the selected music. The melody pattern 1 to be output from the verse (singing portion) is selected (step S2808).

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the melody pattern of the selected music is selected (step S2807 or S2808), the MPU 51 outputs the selected music from the speaker 26 with the selected melody pattern (step S2811), and updates the memory of the selected music (step S2812). , Ends the selected music output process. By updating the memory of the selected song when the song is selected, even if the song is selected multiple times during the song selection validity period, the last selected song during the song selection validity period can be specified. .. Further, since the last selected song in the song selection valid period can be specified, the music order of the selected music in the music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) can be updated based on the finally selected selected music.

In the selected music output process shown in FIG. 41, the inconsistent output lottery is performed when the unselected music is selected, but the inconsistent output lottery may be performed when the selected music is selected. In this case as well, if the inconsistent output lottery is won, for example, the current gaming state is either the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state, or It is possible to know that the 16R probability variation jackpot game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. Further, even when the inconsistent output lottery is performed when the selected music is selected, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the number of inconsistent output lottery. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily and repeatedly selecting the selected music in the jackpot game state.

[Music selection button production processing]
Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing (step S2609 of FIG. 39). In the music selection button effect processing, an unselected music is selected when the promotion effect flag set to be on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to on (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed). In the case, the music selection button production is determined, and the determined music selection button production is executed. The song selection button effect is an expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed, and a probability change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed. That is, in the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect is executed later, the expectation degree suggestion effect and the probability change confirmation effect are executed according to the music determination operation.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, when a decision operation is performed on the decision button 21B for determining a musical piece, a suggestion effect or a promotion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed is executed. There was no one to execute the probabilistic confirmation effect that clearly indicates. Therefore, the conventional game machine has not been able to make the player sufficiently interested in the act of selecting the music and the production when the selected music is selected, and as a result, the player even selects the music. Sometimes not.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is executed when the music is selected, it is possible to grasp in advance the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed by the music selection button effect. Therefore, the player performs the act of selecting a musical piece, and by paying attention to the music selection button effect executed at that time, the player selects a musical piece that could not be fully enjoyed by the conventional game machine. You can enjoy it. Not only that, even if the production is not of interest to the player with the conventional game machine, the production can be focused on, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by causing a melody pattern contradiction on the condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of selecting the song, and the player is not selected. It is possible to positively tentatively select a song. This can give the player a motivation to listen to the unselected music, and can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player.

The music selection button effect processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 42.

<Step S2901>
In step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected music selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is an unselected music. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2902 when the selected music is an unselected music (step S2901: Yes), and when the selected music is not an unselected music, that is, when the selected music is a selected music (step S2901: No), the music selection button production process is terminated without executing the music selection button production.

Here, by determining whether or not the unselected music is determined in step S2901, the music selection button effect can be executed on the condition that the unselected music is selected. Therefore, the music selection button effect (expectation suggestion effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8) shown in FIG. It is possible to positively select an unselected song for a player who wishes to perform the production 4)). This makes it possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the unselected music is selected, but the music selection button effect may be executed even when the selected music is selected. .. Then, the operation of the selection determination unit 21 for selecting the music can be enjoyed not only as an act for selecting the music but also as an act for executing the music selection button effect. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the music, and the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game can be increased to improve the player's motivation to play.

<Step S2902>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music is determined for the first time in the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 of FIG. 39), which is added by 1 by the music determination operation for the determination button 21B, is 1. When the MPU 51 is the first music determination (step S2902: Yes), the process shifts to step S2903, and when it is not the first music determination, that is, when the second and subsequent music determinations are performed (step S2902: No). , The music selection button production process is terminated without executing the music selection button production.

Here, by determining whether or not it is the first music determination in step S2902, the number of times the music selection button effect is executed is limited to one of the first music determination when an unselected music is selected. Will be done. As a result, when the music selection button effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting music without listening to the unselected music sufficiently in the jackpot game state.

The number of times the music selection button effect is executed is not limited to once for each big hit game, and may be executed twice or more. However, it is preferable to set an upper limit number of times (for example, 2 to 5 times) for the number of times of the music selection button effect for one big hit game from the viewpoint of suppressing the selection of unselected music unnecessarily.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag set to be turned on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2904 when the first promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2903: Yes), and performs the process when the first promotion effect flag is not set (step S2903: No). The process proceeds to step S2805.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 has a music selection button effect including a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, and a 5R probability variation confirmation effect clearly indicating that the jackpot game state is a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. 5R Probability change song selection button Executes the effect determination process. The details of the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

<Step S2905>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag set on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to on. When the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2906, and the second promotion effect flag and the third promotion effect flag are turned on. If it is not set (step S2905: No), the song selection button effect process ends without executing the song selection button effect.

In the song selection button effect process of FIG. 42, the song selection button effect can be executed on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON, but when the promotion effect flag is set to off for this song selection button effect. It may be executed in. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to off, as the song selection button effect, only the suggestion effect that suggests the expectation that the jackpot game state is the probability change jackpot game state is executed, and the probability variation jackpot game state is executed. The probabilistic confirmation effect that clearly indicates that is not executed.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 has a music selection button effect including a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state, and a 16R probability variation confirmation effect clearly indicating that the jackpot gaming state is the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. 16R Probability variation song selection button Executes the effect determination process. The details of the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

<S2907>
When the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2904 or S2906), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set to ON to off (step S2907).

<Steps S2908 and S2909>
In step S2908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not no effect (see FIGS. 45 and 48) is selected in the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process. When no effect is selected (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the song selection button effect process without executing the song selection button effect. On the other hand, when no effect is selected (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect selected in the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process (step S2909). The music selection button production process ends.

Here, the music selection button effect processing is executed when the music selection processing in-progress flag is set to ON (steps S2219: Yes and S2220 in FIG. 23). That is, the music selection button effect processing is executed for the first music determination operation until the music selection validity period elapses. As a result, it is possible to prevent the selection of music from being unnecessarily repeated in order to confirm whether or not the music selection button effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music.

[5R probability variation song selection button production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process (step S2904 of FIG. 42). In the 5R probabilistic music selection button effect determination process, the music selection button effect (including no effect) to be executed when the music is selected by the determination operation for the determination button 21B during the music selection valid period is determined. In the following, before explaining the 5R probability variation song selection button production determination process, the music selection button production table showing the degree of expectation of various song selection button productions shown in FIG. 44 and the 5R probability variation song selection button production lottery table shown in FIG. 45 are determined. The 5R probability variation song selection button production lottery table will be described.

As shown in FIG. 44, the music selection button effect table defines suggestion effects 1 to 8 and final effects 1 to 4 according to the degree of expectation (probability change expectation) for the probability change jackpot as the type of the song selection button effect. Suggestion effects 1 to 8 are expectation degree suggestion effects that suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot. On the other hand, the final productions 1 to 4 are productions that clearly indicate that the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the probability variation jackpot, and are the probability variation confirmation effects in which the probability variation expectation is 100%.

The suggestion effect 1 is an effect in which the mini character A is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability change expectation degree is 10%.

The suggestion effect 2 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the tentatively selected music image 832 is changed to blue by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation is 10%.

The suggestion effect 3 is an effect in which the mini character B is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability change expectation degree is 20%.

The suggestion effect 4 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the tentatively selected music image 832 is changed to yellow by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation is 20%.

The suggestion effect 5 is an effect in which the mini characters A and B are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability change expectation degree is 30%.

The suggestion effect 6 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the tentatively selected music image 832 is changed to red by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation is 50%.

The suggestion effect 7 is an effect in which the mini character C is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability change expectation degree is 66%.

The suggestion effect 8 is an effect in which the mini characters A, B, and C are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of song selection, and the probability change expectation is 80%. It is a production.

The final effect 1 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to a rainbow color by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, which triggers the transition to the jackpot game state. It is a 5R probability variation confirmation effect that clearly shows that the jackpot is a 5R probability variation jackpot.

The final effect 2 is an effect in which a special mini character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of song selection, and the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is the 5R probability variation jackpot. It is a probabilistic confirmation effect to be specified. In addition, the final effect 2 is a jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, or 5R normal jackpot) as hit / miss information in any of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB. When the information indicating the above is included, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode, the reserved villa that generates the jackpot by the second hold is executed. It is also a definite production.

In the final effect 3, by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, a special operation sound (for example, a high-pitched operation sound such as "picone") whose operation sound when the decision button 21B is operated at the time of music selection is output is output. It is a production, and is a 16R probability variation confirmation production that clearly indicates that the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The final effect 4 is an effect in which a special operation sound is output and a special mini character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state. Is a probability change confirmation effect that clearly shows that is a 16R probability change jackpot. In addition, the final effect 4 is a jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, or 5R normal jackpot) as hit / miss information in any of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB. When the information indicating the above is included, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode, the reserved villa that generates the jackpot by the second hold is executed. It is also a definite production.

Although the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect also corresponds to the probability change confirmation effect, the song selection button effect setting screen process (FIGS. 66 and 67) described later and the song selection button effect setting history screen process described later (FIGS. 73 and 74). (See) is defined separately from the probabilistic confirmation effect.

As shown in FIG. 45, the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table is referred to when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed within the music selection valid period in the 5R probability variation jackpot game state. The 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables A1 to A8. In each of the tables A1 to A8, the relationship between the music selection button production lottery counter stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and the production type is defined, and the music selection button production can be determined according to the count value of the music selection button production lottery counter. Has been made. In the tables A1 to A4, the music selection button effect lottery counter is not assigned to the suggestion effects 1 to 8 indicating the degree of probability variation expectation that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, in the tables A5 to A8, the music selection button effect lottery counter is allocated to the suggestion effects 1 to 8, and any of the suggestion effects 1 to 8 may be determined. In the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table, since it is referred to in the 5R probability variation jackpot game state, the final effect 3 and the final effect 4 that clearly indicate that the 16R probability variation jackpot is a 16R probability variation jackpot are not specified.

Specifically, the table A1 is a table in which only "no effect" is determined so that the 5R probability variation song selection button effect is not executed even by the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of song selection. That is, on the table A1, none of "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8", "confirmed effect 1", and "confirmed effect 2" is selected as the song selection button effect.

Table A2 is a table in which only "no effect" or "confirmed effect 2", which is a probable change confirmed effect and a reserved consecutive villa confirmed effect, is determined by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, on the table A2, "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" and "fixed effect 1" are not selected as the song selection button effects.

The table A3 is a table in which "no effect" or "confirmation effect 1", which is a probability variation confirmation effect, is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, on the table A3, "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" and "fixed effect 2" are not selected as the song selection button effects.

The table A4 is a table in which "no effect", "confirmed effect 1", or "confirmed effect 2" is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, on the table A4, "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" are not selected as the song selection button effect.

The table A5 is a table in which "no effect" or "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" is determined by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, on the table A5, "fixed effect 1" and "fixed effect 2" are not selected as the song selection button effect.

The table A6 is a table in which "no effect", "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8", or "confirmed effect 2" is determined by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, on the table A6, "fixed effect 1" is not selected as the song selection button effect.

The table A7 is a table in which "no effect", "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8", or "fixed effect 1" is determined by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, on the table A7, "fixed effect 2" is not selected as the song selection button effect.

Table A8 is a table in which "no effect", "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8", "confirmed effect 1", or "confirmed effect 2" is determined by operating the decision button 21B at the time of song selection. .. That is, on the table A8, any of "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8", "confirmed effect 1", and "confirmed effect 2" can be selected as the song selection button effect.

Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the conditions under which the tables A1 to A8 are selected, and is referred to in the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. 43. The 5R probability variation song selection button production lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game setting and the pending consecutive villa flag and the tables A1 to A8. The game setting is a setting by the player as to whether or not to execute each of the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect. When it is set by the player not to execute the expectation suggestion effect, the expectation is in step S4113 in the song selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 66 or step S4513 in the song selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73. The suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. Similarly, according to the setting by the player, in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing of FIG. 66 or step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing of FIG. 73, the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag and the hold consecutive villa The final effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. On the other hand, the reserved consecutive villa flag indicates that the reserved consecutive villa is to be executed, and is set to on in step S2205 of FIG.

In the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, in the table A1 in which only "no effect" is determined, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is on, and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is on. When the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is on and the hold consecutive villa flag is on, or the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is on, the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is on, and the hold consecutive villa flag is on. Selected if off. The tables A2 to A8 are selected when the game setting flag and the reserved consecutive villa flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG. 46, similarly to the table A1.

<Step S3001>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 43, in the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process, in step S3001, the MPU 51 is turned on in the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag set to be on in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. Determine if it is set to. That is, the MPU 51 is set not to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation that the gaming state is the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state or the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state even if the decision button 21B at the time of music selection is operated. It is judged whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set. When the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (when the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002 and shifts the process to step S3002. When the suggestion effect non-execution is set to off (when the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution is not set) (step S3001: No), the process proceeds to step S3012.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag set to be on in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73 is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 is set so as not to execute the probability change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the 5R probability change jackpot game state or the 16R probability change jackpot game state even if the decision button 21B at the time of music selection is performed. Judge whether or not the effect non-execution setting is set. When the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (when the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3003 and does not perform the probability change confirmation effect. When the execution setting flag is set to off (when the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved villa flag indicating that the reserved villa flag set to be turned on in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is executed is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3004 when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), and processes when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3003: No). To step S3005.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 51 does not execute the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect that is set to on in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. Determine if the setting flag is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting, which is the setting not to execute the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the hold consecutive villa is to be performed, is set. When the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005. When the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3004: No), the process proceeds to step S3007.

<Steps S3005 and S3006>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery on the table A1 (see FIG. 45) that selects "no effect" regardless of which button lottery random number counter value is selected. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (probability change). When the final effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa final effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes). (When the hold consecutive villa final effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes), the table A1 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in step S3005, the MPU 51 is set with the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned on (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. Even when it is set (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3002: Yes) and the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3003: No), table A1 as a 5R probability change song selection button effect lottery table Is selected (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A1 (step S3005), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 51 executes a song selection button effect lottery on the table A2 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "confirmation effect 2", which is the 5R probability variation confirmation effect and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, exists. To do. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (probability change). When the final effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa final effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (step S3002: Yes). (When the non-execution setting of the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is not set) (step S3004: No), the table A2 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A2 (step S3007), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved consecutive villa flag indicating that the reserved consecutive villa set to be turned on in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is executed is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3009 when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), and processes when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3008: No). To step S3010.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag set to be turned on in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73 is set to on. When the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3010, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If so (step S3009: No), the process proceeds to step S3011.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery on the table A3 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “confirmation effect 1” which is the 5R probability variation confirmation effect exists. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (probability change). The final effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3002: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa final effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. In this case (when the hold consecutive villa final effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3009: Yes), table A3 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in step S3010, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. Even when it is set (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3002: No) and the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3008: No), 5R probability change song selection button effect lottery table Table A3 is selected as (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A3 (step S3010), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3011>
In step S3011, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery on the table A4 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “fixed effect 1” and the “confirmed effect 2” exists. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (probability change). The final effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3002: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3008: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa final effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. In this case (when the non-execution setting of the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect is not set) (step S3009: No), the table A4 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A4 (step S3011), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3012>
When the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines in step S3012 whether or not the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3013 when the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (step S3012: Yes), and when the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (step S3012: Yes). S3012: No), the process proceeds to step S3017.

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3014 when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3013: Yes), and processes when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3013: No). To step S3015.

<Step S3014>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. When the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (step S3014: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3015, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If so (step S3014: No), the process proceeds to step S3016.

<Step S3015>
In step S3015, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery on the table A5 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggestion effect 1” to “suggestion effect 8” exists. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. (Probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3012: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3013: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. In this case (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3014: Yes), table A5 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in step S3015, the MPU 51 is set with the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to on (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3012: Yes), and even when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3013: No), 5R probability change song selection button effect lottery table Table A5 is selected as (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A5 (step S3015), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 executes a song selection button effect lottery on the table A6 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggestion effect 1” to “suggestion effect 8” and “confirmed effect 2” exists. To do. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. (Probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3012: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3013: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. (Step S3014: No), the table A6 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A6 (step S3016), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3017>
When both the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag and the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag are set to off (No in steps S3001 and S3012), the MPU 51 determines whether the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on. (Step S3017). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3018 when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3017: Yes), and processes when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3017: No). To step S3019.

<Step S3018>
In step S3018, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. When the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (step S3018: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3019, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If so (step S3018: No), the process proceeds to step S3020.

<Step S3019>
In step S3019, the MPU 51 executes a song selection button effect lottery on the table A7 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggestion effect 1” to “suggestion effect 8” and “confirmed effect 1” exists. To do. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. (The probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3017: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. If this is the case (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3018: Yes), table A7 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Further, in step S3019, the MPU 51 is set with the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to off (the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), and even when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3017: No), the 5R probability change song selection button Table A7 is selected as the production lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A7 (step S3019), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3020>
In step S3020, the MPU 51 is in the table A8 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8", "confirmed effect 1", and "confirmed effect 2" exists. Music selection button production Execute a lottery. That is, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. (The probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3017: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If this is the case (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3018: No), table A8 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A8 (step S3020), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

[16R Probability change song selection button production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process (step S2906 in FIG. 42). In the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process, the song selection button effect to be executed when the determination button 21B is operated based on the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table for determining the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 48 ( (Including no production) is decided. The 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process is basically the same as the above-mentioned 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process, and in the 5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. 43, "table A1" to "table". Each of "A8" may be read as "table B1" to "table B8".

Further, the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed within the music selection valid period in the 16R probability variation jackpot game state. The 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables of tables B1 to B8. The 16R probability variation song selection button production lottery table is basically the same as the 5R probability variation song selection button production lottery table, but "confirmation effect 3" is specified instead of "confirmation effect 1" in the 5R probability variation song selection button production lottery table. Then, instead of "fixed effect 2", "fixed effect 4" is specified. That is, in the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table, since it is referred to in the 16R probability variation jackpot game state, the confirmation effect 1 and the confirmation effect 3 that clearly indicate that the 5R probability variation jackpot is not defined. The detailed description of the 16R probability variation song selection button production lottery table will be omitted.

Further, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the conditions under which tables B1 to B8 are selected, and is referred to in the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. 47. The 16R probability variation song selection button production lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game setting and the pending consecutive villa flag and the tables B1 to B8. The game setting and the pending consecutive villa flag are synonymous with the case of the 5R probability variation song selection button production lottery table determination table. In the 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, in table B1 (see FIG. 48) in which only "no effect" is determined, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is turned on as the game setting, and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution When the setting flag is on, the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is on, and the hold consecutive villa flag is on, or the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is on, the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is on, and Selected when the hold consecutive villa flag is off. Note that the tables B2 to B8 are selected when the game setting flag and the reserved consecutive villa flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG. 49, similarly to the table B1.

<Steps S3101 to S3107>
Returning to the description of FIG. 47, in the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability change. The confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3102: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is not When the execution setting flag is set to on (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3104: Yes), any button lottery random number counter is used as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table. Select table B1 (step S3105) (see FIG. 48) that selects “no effect” even if the value of is selected (see FIG. 49). Further, in the MPU 51, the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (probability change). Even when the final effect non-execution setting is made (step S3102: Yes) and the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3103: No), table B1 is selected as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (step S3102: No). Step S3105) (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B1 (step S3105), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3107, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. It is set (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3102: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to off. If there is (when the non-execution setting of the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect is not set) (step S3104: No), as a 16R probability variation song selection button production lottery table, the 16R probability variation confirmation production and the hold consecutive villa confirmation production "confirmation production" Button to select "4" Select the table B2 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B2 (step S3107), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3108 to 3111>
Further, in step S3110, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. It is set (the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3102: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. If it is set (the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3109: Yes), the 16R probability variation confirmation effect "confirmation effect 3" is used as the 16R probability variation song selection button production lottery table. Button to select Select the table B3 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3110, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. Even when it is set (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3102: No) and the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3108: No), 16R probability change song selection button effect lottery table Table B3 is selected as (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B3 (step S3110), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3111, the MPU 51 is set to turn on the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. It is set (the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3102: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned off. When it is set (when the non-execution setting of the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect is not set) (step S3109: No), "confirmation effect 3" and "confirmation effect 4" are set as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table. Button to select Select the table B4 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B4 (step S3111), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3112 to S3116>
In step S3115, the MPU 51 is set to turn off the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned on. (Probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3112: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3113: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. If (step S3114: Yes) (step S3114: Yes), select "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table. Select the table B5 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3115, the MPU 51 is set with the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to on (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is made) (step S3112: Yes), and even when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3113: No), 16R probability change song selection button effect lottery table Table B5 is selected as (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B5 (step S3115), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3116, the MPU 51 is set with the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to on (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3112: Yes), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3113: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. When it is set to off (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3114: No), as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table, "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" ”And“ Final effect 4 ”are selected. Select table B6 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B6 (step S3116), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3117 to S3120>
In step S3117, the MPU 51 is set to turn off the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag (the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is off. (Step S3112: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3117: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is on. When it is set to (step S3118: Yes) (step S3118: Yes), "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" and "confirmation effect" are set as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table. Button to select "3" Select table B7 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3117, the MPU 51 is set with the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to off (the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3112: No), and even when the hold consecutive villa flag is set to off (step S3117: No), the 16R probability change song selection button Table B7 is selected as the production lottery table (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B7 (step S3119), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3120, the MPU 51 is set with the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to off (probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3112: No), the hold consecutive villa flag is set to on (step S3117: Yes), and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set. When is set to off (when the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3118: No), as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table, "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect" 8 ”, a button for selecting“ final effect 3 ”and“ final effect 4 ”Select table B8 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). When the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table B8 (step S3120), the MPU 51 sets the hold consecutive villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process.

[Music selection counter data update process]
Here, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update process (step S2611 in the music selection process of FIG. 39). In the music selection counter data update processing, it is necessary for the music selection image display processing (see FIG. 24) and the initial provisional music selection processing (FIG. 35) according to the music selection status by the player during the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. The music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) is updated. This makes it possible to create a selected music list (see FIG. 30 (A)) and a non-selected music list (see FIG. 30 (B)) necessary for displaying the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it becomes possible to create initial sequence ranking data (see FIG. 31). As a result, by updating the music selection counter data in the music selection counter data update process, the music selection image 83 displayed in the next jackpot game reflects the music selection status by the player in the current jackpot game. The music selection image 83 has high operability for music selection for the player.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the initial tentatively selected music that can be temporarily stored in the RAM 512 is stored in step S2304 in the music selection image display process of FIG. 24, and if the initial tentatively selected music is stored ( Step S3201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102, and when there is no memory of the initial provisionally selected music (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3106.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music determined by the MPU as the initial provisional music (step S2404 in FIG. 35) has been selected as the selection music by the player, and the initial provisional music is selected. If (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3106, and if the initial provisionally selected song is not selected (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3103.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (A1) and 51 (A2), in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29, the music F of the music number 6 is selected as the provisional music by the MPU, and the game is played. When the music F is not selected by the person, the music F is stored in the first place in the non-selected music list ranking, and the non-selected music list before the update is stored in the second and third places in the non-selected music list ranking, respectively. The music I of the music number 9 which was the first place and the music B of the music number 2 which was the second place are stored. Further, among the non-selected songs whose non-selected song list ranking was 3rd before the update, the song C having the oldest non-selected date and time is set to 0th and is changed to an unselected song.

Further, in step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the non-selection flag. The non-selection flag is updated, for example, when the non-selected music list ranking is updated from FIG. 51 (A1) to FIG. 51 (A2), the non-selected music list ranking is changed from 3rd to 0th. This is done by setting the selection flag to off and turning on the non-selection flag of the music F whose non-selected music list ranking has been changed from 0th to 1st. When the data related to the non-selected music (see FIG. 29) in the music selection counter data table is updated (step S3203), the storage of the initial provisionally selected music stored in the RAM 512 is cleared (step S3204).

<Step S3205>
In step S3205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected music can be stored in the RAM 512 in step S2812 in the selected music output process of FIG. 41, and if the selected music is stored (step S3205: Yes). The process proceeds to step S3106, and when the selected music is not stored (step S3205: No), the music selection counter data update process is terminated.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
In step S3206, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (B1) and 51 (B2), when the music E of the music number 5 is selected as the selected music by the player in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29. Adds 1 to the selection count counter of the music E. In addition, the music E is stored in the 1st place in the selected music list ranking, and the 2nd and 3rd places in the selected music list ranking are the music number 1 in which the selected music list ranking before the update was the 1st place, respectively. The music A and the music D of the music number 4 which was the second place are stored. Further, among the selected songs whose ranking was 3rd in the list of selected songs before the update, the song D having the oldest selected date and time of the song number 4 is set to 0th and is changed to an unselected song.

Further, in step S3205, the MPU 51 updates the selected flag. To update the selected music flag, for example, when the non-selected music ranking is updated from FIG. 51 (B1) to FIG. This is done by setting the flag to off and turning on the selected flag of the song E whose selected song list ranking has been changed from 0th to 1st. When the MPU 51 updates the data related to the selected music (see FIG. 29) in the music selection counter data table (step S3206), the music selection counter clears the storage of the selected music stored in the RAM 512 (step S3207). End the data update process.

When a song is selected from the non-selected songs, the song is changed from the non-selected song to the selected song. For example, in FIG. 51 (A1), when the music B having the second non-selected music ranking is selected, the first music in the selected music ranking data is changed to the music B. On the other hand, in the non-selected music ranking data, the music B is deleted from the second place, the music C in the third place is moved up to the second place, and the corresponding music in the third place is updated as no music. Further, the non-selection flag of the music B is set to off, and the selected flag of the music B is set to on. That is, when the music is selected from the non-selected music, the information about the non-selection for the music is cleared from the music selection counter data, and the information that the music is the selected music is included. The addition is performed.

Further, when the selected music list ranking is determined not by the new order of the selected date and time but by the selection frequency, the data related to the selected music is updated based on the selection count counter of the music E. For example, when the music E with the music number 5 is selected as the selected music by the player in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29, the selection count counter is updated to the music E from 0 to 1. There is no change in the selected song list ranking. Therefore, the MPU 51 does not change the selected music list ranking and the selected flag. In addition, when the selected music list order is determined by the selection frequency, if the selected music list order is changed, the selected music is selected according to the same procedure as when updating the data related to the selected music in the order of the newest selection date and time. The list ranking and selected flags are updated.

[Game setting process]
Here, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1711 of FIG. 15). In the game setting process, in the period when the game rotation effect or the jackpot game effect is not executed, the jackpot is performed according to the operation of the selection determination unit 21 (plural selection buttons 21A (211-214) and determination button 21B) by the player. The game setting for the game production is executed.

By the way, as a conventional game, a player can perform game settings related to various effects executed by using the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, etc., such as selection of a character appearing in a game rotation effect or a jackpot game effect. is there. In such a game machine, the player can customize the production to suit his / her own taste by setting the game related to various productions such as selecting a favorite character, and the game rotation production and the jackpot. You can enjoy the game production even more.

On the other hand, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a new feature as a jackpot game effect as compared with the conventional game machine as described above. Specifically, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment displays an image including the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 as the music selection image 83 on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game production (see FIG. 25). ). Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is an initial provisionally selected musical piece before the promotion effect indicating that the gaming state is more favorable to the player than the currently suggested gaming state is executed in the jackpot game. It is clarified that the promotion effect is executed by causing a contradiction in the melody pattern of the music when the provisionally selected music including the music or the selected music is output from the speaker 26, and the determination operation for the determination button 21B when selecting the music. A music selection button effect that suggests or clearly indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed is executed.

Then, in the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, a process is executed when the player sets the game for the jackpot game effect having a new feature with respect to the conventional game machine. Specifically, in the game setting process, the music list display setting relating to the display or non-display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the music selection image display screen 82 according to the operation of the selection determination unit 21 by the player. , The melody pattern setting for the provisionally selected music and the selected music, and the music selection button effect setting for setting the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect are executed. That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can set the music list display setting, the melody pattern setting, and the music selection button effect setting, which are not the conventional game setting items, as the game setting of the jackpot game effect.

Here, in the music list display setting, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 72, for each of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 in the music selection image 83. Can be set to show or hide. As a result, the player can customize the music selection image 83 to the desired display mode. Further, for example, by setting the display mode to be preferred by hiding the information related to the past music selection that the player determines to be unnecessary, the player can temporarily select and select the music without stress. be able to.

Further, in the melody pattern setting, the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music or the selected music (unselected music and selected music) can be set as described later with reference to FIGS. 62 and 70. As a result, the player can not only output the tentatively selected music and the selected music with the default settings, but also output from a part other than the default settings. As a result, the range of selection of the output start portion of the tentatively selected music or the selected music is widened, and the player can output the tentatively selected music or the selected music at his / her own discretion. You can enjoy songs and selected songs.

Further, in the song selection button effect setting, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the song selection button effect as described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 74. As a result, when the player has set to execute the music selection button effect, there is a possibility that the promotion effect will be executed by the act of executing the music selection button effect (the operation on the decision button 21B in the music selection). It can be enjoyed as an act to know. On the other hand, if the player is set not to execute the music selection button effect, the player cannot know in advance whether or not the promotion effect is executed, so that the promotion effect is performed even after the music is selected. Can maintain a sense of expectation that will be carried out. Therefore, by being able to select whether or not to execute the music selection button effect setting, it is possible to enjoy a way of enjoying whether or not the promotion effect is performed according to the taste of the player.

The game setting process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 52. However, before explaining the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, an example of transition of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the screen does not shift to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B)), the demo screen, and the power saving screen, which will be described later, even after a predetermined time has passed from the stop display of the main symbol 921. , The variable stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53 (A)) described later will be maintained, and the game setting will be possible after a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the variable stop screen 92. Of course, the game setting may be enabled immediately after the variable stop screen 92 is displayed, and when a predetermined time elapses after the variable stop screen 92 is displayed, the game is automatically set regardless of the player's operation. The screen may shift to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 53 (A), when the variable display of the main symbol 921 is stopped, the number of holds N and the number of holds M are "0", and the game does not shift to the jackpot game state, the main symbol 921 The fluctuation stop screen 92 in the state where the fluctuation of is stopped is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after a lapse of a predetermined time after the variable stop screen 92 is displayed, the display screen is changed from the variable stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 53 (B). Transition. The top menu screen 93 includes a plurality of selection images 931 to 935, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937.

The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 on the top menu screen 93 are images showing a plurality of selectable items and allowing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. The plurality of selected images 931 to 935 are also images for selecting the display screen of the migration destination. The plurality of selected images 931 to 935 include a selection image 933 of "game setting customization" for setting a game during a jackpot game, and a selection image 935 of "end" for shifting from the top menu screen 93 to the variable stop screen 92. including.

The cursor image 936 on the top menu screen 93 is an image showing an item currently temporarily selected. Further, in the tentatively selected selected image 933 (FIG. 53 (B)), the selected image 933 of the "game setting customization" is the other selected image 931, 932 in order to emphasize that the tentatively selected image is selected. It is displayed in a manner distinguishable from 934 and 935. This point is the same as the provisionally selected music image 832 (see FIG. 25) in the music selection image 83 described above.

The selection determination unit image 937 of the top menu screen 93 is an image imitating the selection determination unit 21 (see FIG. 1), and shows that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determination unit 21. It is an image. In the selection determination unit image 937, the characters "select" are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are emphasized. Is displayed. Further, the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. Further, in the selection determination unit image 937, the characters “decision” are added to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, indicating that an operation should be performed when selecting a tentatively selected item. The display example of the selection determination unit image 937 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 53 (B), and can be changed as appropriate.

On the top menu screen 93, when any item (selected images 931-935) is selected from a plurality of items by the player by operating the enter button 21B, the display screen corresponding to the selected item is displayed. Transition. For example, when the selected image 933 of the "game setting customization" is selected by the player, the screen shifts to the game setting screen 94 shown in FIG. 53 (C). The game setting screen 94 includes a plurality of selection images 941-945, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937. Since the cursor image 936 and the selection determination unit image 937 are the same as in the case of the top menu screen 93, the description thereof will be omitted. In the following, if the same is true for the cursor image 936 and the selection determination unit image 937 on the top menu screen 93, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 of the game setting screen 94 show a plurality of selectable items (display screens of the migration destination), and allow the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. It is an image. The plurality of selected images 941 to 945 include the selected image 943 of the "normal music selection setting", the selected image 944 of the "setting history music selection setting", the selected image 945 of "return to the top menu", and the like.

Here, FIG. 54 (A) shows an example of the game setting screen 94 as in FIG. 53 (C), and FIGS. 54 (B), 54 (C) and 54 (D) are the same. This is an example of a display screen that shifts from the game setting screen 94. Specifically, FIG. 54 (B) is an example of the setting item selection screen 95, FIG. 54 (C) is an example of the setting history selection screen 96, and FIG. 54 (D) is the same as FIG. 53 (B). This is an example of the top menu screen 93. That is, when the selection image 943 of the "normal song selection setting" is selected on the game setting screen shown in FIG. 54 (A), the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting item selection screen 95, and the "setting" is performed. When the selection image 944 of "History song selection setting" is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 54 (C), and the selection image 965 of "Return to top menu" is displayed. When selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the above-mentioned top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 54 (D). Hereinafter, the setting item selection screen 95 will be described with reference to FIG. 55, and the setting history selection screen 96 will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

The setting item selection screen 95 shown in FIG. 55 is a screen that enables individual selection of items related to music selection in the jackpot game. The setting item selection screen 95 includes a plurality of selected images 951-955. The selection image 951 of the "melody pattern" is an image selected when the melody pattern is set among the music selection setting items. When the selected image 951 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97. The selected image 952 of the "music list display" is an image selected when the music list display setting among the music selection setting items is performed. When the selected image 952 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98. The selection image 953 of the “music selection button effect” is an image selected when the song selection button effect setting is performed among the song selection setting items. When the selected image 953 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99. The selected image 954 of "back one" is an image to be selected when returning one display screen. When the selected image 954 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54 (A)), which is the display screen before shifting to the setting item selection screen 95. The selected image 955 of "return to the top menu" is an image selected when returning the display screen to the top menu screen 93. When the selected image 955 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)).

The setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 56 is a screen that displays the setting history of items related to music selection in the winning game and allows individual selection of items related to music selection in the jackpot game. The setting history selection screen 96 includes a plurality of selected images 961 to 965. The selected image 961 of the "melody pattern setting history" is an image selected when the melody pattern is set based on the melody pattern setting history. When the selected image 961 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the melody pattern setting history screen 87. The selected image 962 of the "music list display setting history" is an image to be selected when the music list display setting is performed based on the music list display setting history. When the selected image 962 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen 88. The selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” is an image selected when the song selection button effect setting is performed based on the setting history of the song selection button effect. When the selected image 963 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. The selected image 964 of "back by one" is an image to be selected when returning one display screen. When the selected image 964 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 (FIG. 54 (A)), which is the display screen before shifting to the setting history selection screen 96. The selected image 965 of "return to the top menu" is an image selected when the display screen is returned to the top menu screen 93. When the selected image 965 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)).

<Step S3401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 52, in step S3401 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the variable stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53 (A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to be on when the value of the fluctuation display counter updated in the counter update processing (step S1707) of FIG. 15 is 0, and the fluctuation stop in the top menu screen processing of FIG. 58, which will be described later. Whether or not the display screen is the variable stop screen 92 is determined depending on whether or not the variable stop screen display flag set to be on in the screen transition process is on.

When the display screen is the variable stop screen 92 (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3402, and when the display screen is not the variable stop screen 92 (step S3401: No), the process shifts to step S3403. To do.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 executes the game start standby process and ends the game setting process. The details of the game start waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). Specifically, the MPU 51 has a top menu screen display flag that is set to be on in the top menu screen transition process such as step S3504 of the game start standby process of FIG. 57 described later and step S3711 of the game setting screen process of FIG. 59 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 based on whether or not it is on. When the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3404, and when the display screen is not the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: No), the process shifts to step S3405.

<Step S3404>
In step S3404, the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54 (A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 has the game setting screen display flag set to be turned on in the game setting screen transition processing such as step S3609 of the top menu screen processing of FIG. 58 and step S3813 of the setting item selection processing of FIG. 60, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 based on whether or not the display screen is. When the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3406, and when the display screen is not the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: No), the process shifts to step S3407. To do.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 51 executes the game setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54 (B) and 55). Specifically, the MPU 51 displays a setting item selection screen that is set to be turned on in the setting item selection screen transition process such as step S3707 of the game setting process of FIG. 59 and step S3907 of the melody pattern setting screen process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 based on whether or not the flag is on. When the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3408, and when the display screen is not the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: No), the process is performed in step S3409. Move to.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 51 executes the setting item selection process and ends the game setting process. The details of the setting item selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62). Specifically, the MPU 51 is based on whether or not the melody pattern setting screen display flag set to be on in the melody pattern setting screen transition process of step S3807 in the setting item selection process of FIG. 60, which will be described later, is on. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97. When the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3410, and when the display screen is not the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: No), the process is performed in step S3411. Move to.

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 executes the melody pattern setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The melody pattern setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

<Step S3411>
In step S3411, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64 (A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 is based on whether or not the music list display setting screen display flag set to be on in the music list display setting screen transition process in step S3809 in the setting item selection process of FIG. 60, which will be described later, is on. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98. When the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3412, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S3413.

<Step S3412>
In step S3412, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the music list display setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67). Specifically, the MPU 51 is based on whether or not the song selection button effect setting screen display flag set to be turned on in the song selection button effect setting screen transition process in step S3811 in the setting item selection process of FIG. 60, which will be described later, is on. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99. When the display screen is the song selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3414, and when the display screen is not the song selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect setting screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the music selection button effect setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54 (C) and 56). Specifically, the MPU 51 includes step S4307 in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69 described later, step S4407 in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71 described later, and the music selection button effect setting history of FIG. 73 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 based on whether or not the setting history selection screen display flag set to be turned on in the setting history selection screen transition processing in step S4507 in the screen processing is on. to decide. When the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3416, and when the display screen is not the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: No), the process is performed in step S3417. Move to.

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 51 executes the setting history selection process and ends the game setting process. The details of the setting history selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70). Specifically, the MPU 51 is based on whether or not the melody pattern setting history screen display flag set to be turned on in the melody pattern setting history screen transition process of step S4207 in the setting history selection process of FIG. 68, which will be described later, is on. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87. When the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3418, and when the display screen is not the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S3419.

<Step S3418>
In step S3418, the MPU 51 executes the melody pattern setting history screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the melody pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

<Step S3419>
In step S3419, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting history screen display flag set to be on in the music list display history screen transition process in step S4209 in the setting history selection process of FIG. 68, which will be described later, is on. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88. When the display screen of the MPU 51 is the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: Yes), the process shifts to step S3420, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: No), The process proceeds to step S3421.

<Step S3420>
In step S3420, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting history screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the music list display setting history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

<Step S3421>
In step S3421, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the song selection button effect setting history screen display flag set to be turned on in the song selection button effect history screen transition process in step S4211 in the setting history selection process of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. When the display screen of the MPU 51 is the song selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: Yes), the process shifts to step S3422, and the display screen is not the song selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: No). The process proceeds to step S3423.

<Step S3422>
In step S3422, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect history screen process and ends the game setting process. The details of the music selection button effect history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

<Step S3423>
In step S3423, the display screen of the MPU 51 is changed, the display screen is changed, the stop screen 92, the top menu screen 93, the game setting screen 94, the setting item selection screen 95, the setting history selection screen 96, the melody pattern setting screen 97, the music list display setting screen 98, and the music selection. If it is neither the button effect setting screen 99, the melody pattern setting history screen 87, the music list display setting history screen 88, or the music selection button effect setting history screen 89, other processing corresponding to the current display screen is executed to set the game. End the process.

[Game start waiting process]
Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process (step S3402 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the game start standby process, the display screen is changed from the variable stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53 (A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)) according to the operation of the player's operation button 20. ) Is executed.

<Step S3501>
In step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol has started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. The MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started when the value of the fluctuation display counter is not 0.

When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game start waiting process and determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3501: No). ), The process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18A). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503, and when it is determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S3502: No), the game starts. End the standby process.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 92. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed (when the value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the timing counter and refers to the value of the timing counter to display the fluctuation stop screen 92. Can be grasped the time since is displayed.

When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S3503: Yes), the process shifts to step S3504, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3503: No), the game start waiting process To finish.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time after shifting to the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3502: Yes and step S3503: Yes), the player operates the operation button 20. The display screen is changed from the variable stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 accordingly. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Top menu screen processing]
Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen processing (step S3404 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). In the top menu screen processing, the items selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 are selected from the plurality of selection images 941 to 945 displayed on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). The process of shifting the display screen to the corresponding screen is executed.

<Step S3601>
In step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3601: Yes), the process shifts to step S3602, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3601: No). , The process proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3602>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3601: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to off (step S3602), and the top menu screen processing is terminated.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 is raised based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3604, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S3603: No), the process To step S3605.

<Step S3604>
When it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). Is executed (step S3604). For example, the MPU 51 selects the cursor image 936 when the upper selection button 211 is operated while the selection image 933 of the "game setting customization" shown in FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D) is temporarily selected. It is moved to the side of the selected image 932, which is one level higher than 933. At this time, the selected image indicating that the temporary selection is displayed is changed from the selected image 933 to the selected image 932. On the other hand, in the MPU 51, when the lower selection button 212 is operated while the selection image 933 of "game setting customization" is temporarily selected, the cursor image 936 is placed on the side of the selection image 934 one below the selection image 933. The selected image indicating that the temporary selection is displayed is changed from the selected image 933 to the selected image 934. When the process of step S3604 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen process.

The MPU 51 has a cursor image 936 and even if an operation is performed on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 when the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). Processing such as moving the temporary selection display of the selected images 914 to 945 is not executed.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F).

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S3605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3606, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S3605: No), the said End the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "end" selection image 935 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)) on the top menu screen 93 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. To do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "end". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 935 of "end" is selected (step S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3607, and when it is determined that the selected image 935 of "end" is not selected (step S3606: Yes). S3606: No), the process proceeds to step S3608.

<Step S3607>
When it is determined that the selected image 935 of "End" is selected (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)) to the variable stop screen 92 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). The variable stop screen transition process for transitioning to FIG. 53 (A) is executed (step S3607). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3608>
In step S3608, whether or not the MPU 51 has selected the selection image 933 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)) of the “game setting customization” on the top menu screen 93 by the operation of the decision button 21B by the player. To judge. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "game setting customization". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 935 of the "game setting customization" is selected (step S3608: Yes), the process shifts to step S3609 and determines that the selected image 935 of the "game setting customization" is not selected. If so (step S3608: No), the process proceeds to step S3610.

<Step S3609>
When it is determined that the selected image 935 of the "game setting customization" is selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the game setting screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). The game setting screen transition process for shifting to 94 (see FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (A)) is executed (step S3609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, while setting the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3610>
In step S3610, the MPU 51 shifts to the display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player when the item selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B is other than "end" and "customize game setting". .. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off.

[Game setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process (step S3406 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the game setting screen processing, the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54 (B)) and the setting history selection from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54 (A)) according to the operation of the selection determination unit 21 by the player. A process of shifting the display screen to the screen 96 (see FIG. 54 (C)) or the top menu screen (see FIG. 54 (D)) is executed.

<Step S3701>
In step S3701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3701: Yes), the process shifts to step S3702, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3701: No). , The process proceeds to step S3703.

<Step S3702>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3701: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to off (step S3702), and the game setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S3703>
In step S3703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 is raised based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S3703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3704, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S3703: No), the process To step S3705.

<Step S3704>
In step S3704, in the MPU 51, as in the provisional selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. 58, whether the operated selection button 21A is either the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The temporary selection display change process for moving the cursor image 936 and the temporary selection display up or down by one is executed on the game setting screen 94 accordingly. When the process of step S3704 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S3705: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3706, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S3705: No), the said End the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 943 (see FIG. 54 (A)) of the "normal music selection setting" on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "normal song selection setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 943 of the "normal song selection setting" is selected (step S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3707 and determines that the selected image 943 of the "normal song selection setting" is not selected. If so (step S3706: No), the process proceeds to step S3708.

<Step S3707>
When it is determined that the selected image 943 of the "normal song selection setting" is selected (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (A)). The setting item selection screen transition process for shifting to the selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54 (B) and 55) is executed (step S3707). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 944 (see FIG. 54 (A)) of the “setting history music selection setting” on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "setting history song selection setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 944 of the "setting history song selection setting" is selected (step S3708: Yes), the process shifts to step S3709, and the selected image 944 of the "setting history song selection setting" is not selected. If it is determined (step S3708: No), the process proceeds to step S3710.

<Step S3709>
When it is determined that the selected image 944 of the "setting history song selection setting" is selected (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (A)). The setting history selection screen transition process for shifting to the history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54 (C)) is executed (step S3709). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3710>
In step S3710, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 945 of "return to the top menu" on the game setting screen 94 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 945 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S3710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3711 and determines that the selected image 945 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If so (step S3710: No), the process proceeds to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
When it is determined that the selected image 945 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (A)) to the top menu screen. The top menu screen transition process for transitioning to 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D) is executed (step S3711). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, the MPU 51 is selected by the player when the items selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B are other than "normal song selection setting", "setting history song selection setting", and "return to top menu". Move to the display screen corresponding to the item. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off.

[Setting item selection process]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting item selection process (step S3408 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 55, in the setting item selection process, the items selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 from the music selection related items at the time of the jackpot game displayed on the setting item selection screen 95, etc., are selected. A process of shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to various setting screens 97 to 99 is executed. In the following, as the setting item selection process, a case where the music selection related items are the melody pattern, the music list display (music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect will be described as an example. However, the music selection related items are not limited to the melody pattern, the music list display (music selection image 83), and the music selection button production. For example, it is conceivable to allow the player to set other music selection related items instead of a part or all of the melody pattern, the music list display (music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect. For example, as another music selection-related item, it is conceivable to fix the initial tentatively selected music or the selected music by setting by the player.

<Step S3801>
In step S3801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3801: Yes), the process shifts to step S3802, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3801: No). , The process proceeds to step S3803.

<Step S3802>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off (step S3802), and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3803>
In step S3803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 has an upper selection button based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). It is determined whether or not the 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S3803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3804, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S3803: No), the process To step S3805.

<Step S3804>
When it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S3603: Yes), in the MPU 51, the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button in the same manner as in the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. The temporary selection display change process for moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display up or down by one on the setting item selection screen 95 is executed according to which of the 211 and the down selection button 212 (step). S3804). When the process of step S3804 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S3805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3806, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S3805: No), the said End the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 951 (see FIG. 55) of the "melody pattern setting" on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "melody pattern setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 951 of the "melody pattern setting" is selected (step S3806: Yes), the process shifts to step S3807 and determines that the selected image 951 of the "melody pattern setting" is not selected. If this is the case (step S3806: No), the process proceeds to step S3808.

<Step S3807>
When it is determined that the selected image 951 of the "melody pattern setting" is selected (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97 as shown in FIG. 55. The melody pattern setting screen transition process is executed (step S3807). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, while setting the melody pattern setting screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 952 (see FIG. 55) of the "music list display setting" on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the enter button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "music list display setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 952 of the "music list display setting" is selected (step S3808: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3809, and the selected image 952 of the "music list display setting" is not selected. If it is determined (step S3808: No), the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Step S3809>
When it is determined that the selected image 952 of the "music list display setting" is selected (step S3808: Yes), as shown in FIG. 55, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98. The music list display setting screen migration process to be transferred is executed (step S3809). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, while setting the music list display setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3810>
In step S3810, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 953 (see FIG. 55) of the “music selection button effect setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is the “music selection button effect setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 953 of the "music selection button effect setting" is selected (step S3810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3811, and the selected image 953 of the "music selection button effect setting" is not selected. If it is determined (step S3810: No), the process proceeds to step S3812.

<Step S3811>
When it is determined that the selected image 953 of the "music selection button effect setting" is selected (step S3810: Yes), as shown in FIG. 55, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the song selection button effect setting screen 99. The music selection button effect setting screen transition process to be transferred is executed (step S3811). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, while setting the song selection button effect setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3812>
In step S3812, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 954 (see FIG. 55) of "back by one" on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is an item of "back by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one" selected image 954 is selected (step S3812: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3813, and the MPU 51 determines that the "back one" selected image 954 is not selected. If this is the case (step S3812: No), the process proceeds to step S3814.

<Step S3813>
When it is determined that the selected image 954 of "back by one" is selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 (as shown in FIG. 55). Step S3813). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off while setting the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3814>
The MPU 51 goes to the "top menu" when the items selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B are other than "melody pattern setting", "music list display setting", "music selection button effect setting" and "back one". Since it can be determined that "return" has been selected, as shown in FIG. 55, a top menu screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S3814). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Melody pattern setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen processing (step S3410 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting screen process, a process of setting the melody pattern (start of music output) of the temporarily selected music and the selected music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game is executed. Further, FIG. 62 shows an example of the melody pattern setting screen 97. In the following, the melody pattern setting screen 97 will be described first with reference to FIG. 62, and then the melody pattern setting screen processing will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

As shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern setting screen 97 is a screen for setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music in the jackpot game, and the unselected music and the selected music as the selected music. .. The melody pattern setting screen 97 includes the tentatively selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, the selected music setting image 973, the selected images 974 to 976, and the selection determination unit image 977.

The temporary selection music setting image 971 is an image for setting a melody pattern of the temporary selection music. That is, the temporary selection music setting image 971 is an image for setting whether to start the output when the temporary selection music is selected by the player from the singing portion or the chorus portion, and sings the output start. It has a singing selection image for setting to perform from the output portion and a chorus selection image for setting to perform output start from the chorus portion.

The unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is an unselected music. That is, the unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting whether to start the output when the unselected music is selected by the player from the singing portion or the chorus portion, and sings the output start. It has a singing selection image for setting to perform from the output portion and a chorus selection image for setting to perform output start from the chorus portion.

The selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is a selected music. That is, the selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting whether to start the output when the selected music is selected by the player from the singing portion or the chorus or the portion, and the output start is started. It has a singing selection image that sets to perform from the singing portion, and a chorus selection image that sets to perform output start from the chorus portion.

The plurality of selected images 974 to 976 are selected images 974 of "back one" selected when the display screen is returned by one and the screen is moved to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54 (B) and 55). Selected image 975 of "Return to top menu" selected when shifting the display screen to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)), and provisionally selected music, unselected music, and selected music. Includes the "Random" selection image 976 that causes the game machine 10 to set the output start of. In the present embodiment, when the selection image 976 of "Random" is selected to perform the automatic setting, the melody patterns of the provisionally selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music are all set as default settings.

The selection determination unit image 977 is an image that imitates the selection determination unit 21, and is an image showing that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determination unit 21. In the selection determination unit image 977, the characters "select" are added to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214, and the selection buttons 211 to 214 are displayed. The corresponding image is highlighted. Further, the images corresponding to the selection buttons 211 to 214 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. Further, in the selection determination unit image 977, the character "determine" is added to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, indicating that an operation should be performed when selecting a tentatively selected item.

<Step S3901>
Returning to the description of FIG. 61, in step S3901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3901: Yes), the process shifts to step S3902, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3901: No). , The process proceeds to step S3903.

<Step S3902>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off (step S3902), and ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flag, a first to third lower selection operation pattern flag, a first to third left selection operation pattern flag, and a first to third right selection operation. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3904, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S3903: No), the process To step S3905.

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the MPU 51 temporarily selects on the melody pattern setting screen 97 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. The temporary selection display change process for moving the display to one in any of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S3904 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S3905: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3906, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S3905: No), the said The melody pattern setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 62) of "back by one" on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3907 and determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is not selected. If so (step S3906: No), the process proceeds to step S3908.

<Step S3907>
When it is determined that the selected image 974 of "back by one" is selected (step S3906: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 54 (B). ) And FIG. 55), the setting item selection screen transition process is executed (step S3907). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 62) of "return to the top menu" on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the operation of the enter button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S3908: Yes), the process shifts to step S3909 and determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If so (step S3908: No), the process proceeds to step S3910.

<Step S3909>
When it is determined that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B)). The top menu screen transition process for transitioning to FIG. 54 (D) is executed (step S3909). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "Random" selection image 976 (see FIG. 62) on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "Random". When the MPU 51 determines that the "Random" selected image 976 is selected (step S3910: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3911, and when it is determined that the "Random" selected image 976 is not selected (step S3910: Yes). S3910: No), the process proceeds to step S3912.

<Step S3911>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is selected (step S3910: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music as default (step S3911). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is the melody pattern 2 in which the output starts from the chorus part for the temporarily selected music, and the output starts from the singing part (A melody part) for the selected music as the selected music. The melody pattern 1 and the unselected music as the selected music are the melody pattern 2 in which the output is started from the chorus portion (see FIG. 38).

<Step S3912>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S3910: No), that is, the operation of the player for the decision button 21B is "returns by one", "returns to the top menu", or "Random". If the operation for the item of is not applicable, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the settings temporarily selected in the provisionally selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the selected music setting image 973 (step S3912). ). For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the tentative selection state shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern 2 that starts the output from the chorus portion for the tentatively selected song and the unselected song as the selected song are sung. The melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) is set, and the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus portion is set for the selected music as the selected music. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the set contents and the set time of the melody pattern in the RAM 512. As a result, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) can be displayed in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69, which will be described later.

As described above, in step S3912, the player selects and determines the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the provisionally selected music and the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected music and the selected music as the selected music. This can be done by operating the unit 21. Therefore, the player can select whether to listen to the provisionally selected music and the selected music from the beginning or from the chorus portion having the highest excitement according to his / her taste. This makes it easier to determine whether the tentatively selected song is one's favorite song, and the selected song can be enjoyed according to one's taste in either case of the unselected song or the selected song.

<Step S3913>
In step S3913, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting flag to on for the items set in the melody pattern different from the default setting. Here, the melody pattern setting flag includes a tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag for the tentatively selected music, an unselected music melody pattern setting flag for the unselected music, and a selected music melody pattern setting flag for the selected music. For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the tentative selection state shown in FIG. 62, the unselected song melody pattern setting flag and the unselected song melody pattern setting flag and the selected song are set to the melody pattern different from the default setting. The selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to on.

<Step S3914>
In step S3914, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music are set, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

[Music list display setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen process (step S3412 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music list display setting screen processing, the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game are displayed. A process for setting a display regarding the presence / absence (display mode) of is executed. Further, FIG. 64 (A) shows an example of the music list display setting screen 98, and FIGS. 64 (B), 65 (A) and 65 (B) show an example of the display mode of the music selection image display screen 82. .. In the following, the display mode of the music list display setting screen 98 and the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, and then the music selection image display process will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

The music list display setting screen 98 shown in FIG. 64 (A) is a screen for setting the display mode of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game. .. The music list display setting screen 98 includes the disliked music selection image 981 and the favorite music selection image 982, as well as the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit image 977 as in the melody pattern setting screen 97. Since the selected images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit images 977 are the same as in the case of the melody pattern setting screen 97, the description thereof will be omitted. In the following, if the same as the selected images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit image 977 on the melody pattern setting screen 97, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The disliked music selection image 981 is an image for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. The disliked music selection image 981 is a display selection image selected when setting to display the non-selection music image 834, and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the non-selection music image 834. Have. In the present embodiment, "hiding the non-selected music image 834" does not mean that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed, but that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is unselected other than the non-selected music. It means that it is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden, the music selection image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG. 64 (B).

As another embodiment, it is conceivable that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden. According to such another embodiment, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden, the non-selected music that was previously selected as the initial provisional music but was not selected by the player is erroneously selected. You can avoid making a selection.

The favorite music selection image 982 is an image for setting whether or not to display the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. The favorite music selection image 982 is a display selection image selected when setting to display the selected music image 831 and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the selected music image 831. Have. In the present embodiment, "hiding the selected music image 831" does not mean that the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not displayed, but that the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. It means that it is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the selected music image 831 is set to be hidden, the music selection image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG. 65 (A).

As another embodiment, it is conceivable that the music selection image 83 for the selected music is not displayed when the selected music image 831 is set to be hidden. According to such another embodiment, when the selected music image 831 is set to be hidden, it is possible to avoid repeatedly selecting the selected music previously selected by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), when both the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are set to be hidden, the music selection images 83 other than the provisional music image 832 are displayed in the same manner. To.

<Step S4001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 63, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4001: Yes), the process shifts to step S4002, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4001: No). , The process proceeds to step S4003.

<Step S4002>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off (step S4002), and ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flag, a first to third lower selection operation pattern flag, a first to third left selection operation pattern flag, and a first to third right selection operation. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4004, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S4003: No), the process To step S4005.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 51 temporarily displays the music list display setting screen 98 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. The temporary selection display change process for moving the selection display to one in any of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4004 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4006, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S4005: No), the said The music list display setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 64 (A)) of the “back by one” selection image 974 of the music list display setting screen 98 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. .. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4006: Yes), the process shifts to step S4007, and determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is not selected. If so (step S4006: No), the process proceeds to step S4008.

<Step S4007>
When it is determined that the selected image 974 of "back by one" is selected (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64 (A)) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 64 (A)). The setting item selection screen transition process for transitioning to FIG. 54 (B) and FIG. 55) is executed (step S4007). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4008>
In step S4008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 975 (see FIG. 64 (A)) of "return to the top menu" on the music list display setting screen 98 is selected by the operation of the enter button 21B by the player. .. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4009 and determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If so (step S4008: No), the process proceeds to step S4010.

<Step S4009>
When it is determined that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64 (A)) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53). The top menu screen transition process for transitioning to (B) and FIG. 54 (D) is executed (step S4009). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4010>
In step S4010, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 976 (see FIG. 64 (A)) of “Random” on the music list display setting screen 98 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "Random". When the MPU 51 determines that the "Random" selected image 976 is selected (step S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4011, and when it is determined that the "Random" selected image 976 is not selected (step S4010: Yes). S4010: No), the process proceeds to step S4012.

<Step S4011>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is selected (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. And the display setting of the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (selected music) is set as the default (step S4011). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4012>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4010: No), that is, the operation of the player for the decision button 21B is "returns by one", "returns to the top menu", or "Random". If the operation for the item of is not applicable, the MPU 51 sets the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image to the setting temporarily selected for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) and the favorite selected music (selected music). The display of 831 (see FIG. 25) is set (step S4012). For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 64 (A), the non-selected music image 834 is set to be displayed and the selected music image 831 is set to be hidden. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the set contents and the set time of the music selection image 83 in the RAM 512. As a result, the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) can be displayed in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71, which will be described later.

As described above, in step S4012, the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music (disliked music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 can be displayed or hidden, so that the display mode can be adjusted to the player's preference. The music selection image 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, the player can select the music to be output from the speaker 26 based on the music selection image 83 of the display mode set by himself / herself. Further, by setting the hidden music image 831 to be hidden by the player, for example, the music selection image 83 includes the selected music image 831 for the selected music previously selected by the previous player. In some cases, the music selection image 83 that does not include the selected music image 831 can be displayed. Similarly, by setting the non-selected music image 834 to be hidden, the player includes, for example, the non-selected music image 834 for the non-selected music that the previous player did not select in the past in the music selection image 83. In this case, the music selection image 83 that does not include the non-selection music image 834 can be displayed.

<Step S4013>
In step S4013, the MPU 51 performs a hidden setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the hide setting flag is set to on for the item set to "hide" which is different from the default setting. Here, the non-display setting flag includes a non-selected music image non-display setting flag for a disliked selected music (non-selected music) and a selected music image non-display setting flag for a favorite selected music (selected music). For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the tentative selection state shown in FIG. 64 (A), the selected song image is not selected for the favorite selected song (selected song) whose display setting is different from the default setting. The display setting flag is set to on.

<Step S4014>
In step S4014, the MPU 51 performs a top menu screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64 (A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). Execute. That is, when the display settings of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Music selection button production setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen process (step S3414 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting screen processing, processing for setting the music selection button effect executed at the time of selecting a music in the jackpot game is executed. Further, FIG. 67 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting screen 99. In the following, the music selection button effect setting screen 99 will be described first with reference to FIG. 67, and then the music selection image display process will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

The music selection button effect setting screen 99 shown in FIG. 67 is a screen for setting the music selection button effect executed at the time of selecting music in the jackpot game. The music selection button effect setting screen 99 includes the expected degree suggestion effect setting image 991, the probability variation confirmation effect setting image 992, the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect setting image 993, and the selection images 974 to 976 and selection similar to the melody pattern setting screen 97 and the like. Includes determination part image 977.

The expectation degree suggestion effect setting image 991 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect at the time of selecting a music in the jackpot game. The expectation degree suggestion effect setting image 991 is an execution selection image (an image of "execution") for setting to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect, and a non-execution selection image (an image of "execution") for setting not to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect. It has an image of "do not execute"). The expectation degree suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the suggestion effects 1 to 8 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond.

The probability variation confirmation effect setting image 992 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the probability variation confirmation effect when selecting a song in the jackpot game. The probability variation confirmation effect setting image 992 includes an execution selection image (an image of "execute") for setting to execute the probability variation confirmation effect and a non-execution selection image ("do not execute") for setting not to execute the probability variation confirmation effect. Image). The probability variation confirmation effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the final effect 1 and the final effect 3 described with reference to FIG. 44 are applicable.

The hold consecutive villa final effect setting image 993 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the hold consecutive villa final effect when selecting a song in the jackpot game. The hold consecutive villa confirmation effect setting image 993 is an execution selection image (an image of "execute") for setting to execute the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, and non-execution for setting not to execute the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect. It has a selected image (an image of "do not execute"). It should be noted that the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive villa will be performed as described above, and in the present embodiment, the final effect 2 and the final effect 4 described with reference to FIG. 44 are applicable.

<Step S4101>
Returning to the description of FIG. 66, in step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4101: Yes), the process shifts to step S4102, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4101: No). , The process proceeds to step S4103.

<Step S4102>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off (step S4102), and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4103>
In step S4103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flag, a first to third lower selection operation pattern flag, a first to third left selection operation pattern flag, and a first to third right selection operation. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S4103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4104, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S4103: No), the process To step S4105.

<Step S4104>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 temporarily displays the music selection button effect setting screen 99 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. The temporary selection display change process for moving the selection display to one in any of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4104 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the song selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4105>
In step S4105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S4105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4106, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S4105: No), the said Music selection button effect setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4106>
In step S4106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 67) of the “back by one” selection button 21B on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one" selected image 974 is selected (step S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4107, and the MPU 51 determines that the "back one" selected image 974 is not selected. If so (step S4106: No), the process proceeds to step S4108.

<Step S4107>
When it is determined that the selected image 974 of "back by one" is selected (step S4106: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 54 (FIG. 54). B) and FIG. 55) are transferred to the setting item selection screen transition process (step S4107). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4108>
In step S4108, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 67) of the “return to top menu” of the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the operation of the decision button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4108: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4109 and determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If this is the case (step S4108: No), the process proceeds to step S4110.

<Step S4109>
When it is determined that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B)). And the top menu screen transition process for transitioning to FIG. 54 (D)) (step S4109). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the song selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the song selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4110>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 67) of "Random" on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "Random". When the MPU 51 determines that the "Random" selected image 976 is selected (step S4110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4111, and when it is determined that the "Random" selected image 976 is not selected (step S4110: Yes). S4110: No), the process proceeds to step S4112.

<Step S4111>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is selected (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect regarding whether or not the expected degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are executed as the song selection button effect. The setting is set to the default (step S4111). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4112>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, the operation of the player for the decision button 21B is "returns by one", "returns to the top menu", or "automatic". When the operation for the item of is not applicable, the MPU 51 sets the effect execution setting regarding whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are executed to be temporarily selected (step S4112). For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 67, the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, the probability change confirmation effect is executed, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect is set to non-execution. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the set contents and the set time of the music selection button effect in the RAM 512. As a result, the song selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) can be displayed in the song selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73, which will be described later.

In this way, in step S4112, the execution or non-execution of the song selection button effect can be set individually for the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect, so that the song selection button effect is executed according to the player's preference. Can be made to. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the jackpot game in a way that suits him / herself.

Specifically, the player sets the expectation degree suggestion effect to execute, for example, the determination operation for the decision button 21B for selecting a musical piece is set to the expectation degree of the 5R probability variation jackpot game state or the 16R probability variation jackpot game state. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm. On the other hand, by setting the expectation suggestion effect to non-execution, the expectation suggestion effect is not executed even if the decision operation is performed. Therefore, the 5R probability variation jackpot without worrying about the expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion effect. You can enjoy the jackpot game with the expectation that it is in the game state or the 16R probability variation jackpot game state.

Further, by setting the probability variation confirmation effect to execute, the player confirms whether or not the determination operation for the determination button 21B for selecting a musical piece is, for example, the 5R probability variation jackpot game state or the 16R probability variation jackpot game state. It can be enjoyed as an act for. On the other hand, by setting the probability change confirmation effect to non-execution, the probability change confirmation effect is not executed even if the decision operation is performed. Therefore, the 5R probability change jackpot game state without worrying about whether or not the probability change confirmation effect is executed. Alternatively, the jackpot game can be enjoyed with the expectation that the player is in the 16R probability variation jackpot game state.

Further, by setting the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect to execute, the player enjoys, for example, the decision operation for the decision button 21B for selecting a song as an act for confirming whether or not the hold consecutive villa occurs. be able to. On the other hand, by setting the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect to non-execution, the hold consecutive villa final effect is not executed even if the decision operation is performed, so there is no need to worry about whether or not the hold consecutive villa final effect is executed. , You can enjoy the reserved game with the expectation that the reserved consecutive villa will occur.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 performs the effect non-execution setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the song selection button effect flag is set to on for the item set to "do not execute", which is different from the default setting. Here, the effect non-execution setting flag includes an expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, a probability variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag, and a hold profitable consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 67, the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set on for the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect different from the default setting.

<Step S4114>
In step S4114, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the setting for whether or not the music selection button effect is executed is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Setting history selection process]
Here, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting history selection process (step S3416 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 56, in the setting history selection process, the selection determination unit 21 by the player is selected from the music selection related items at the time of the jackpot game displayed on the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54 (C) and 56). A process of shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to various setting screens 87 to 89 and the like is executed according to the item selected by the operation for (see FIG. 56). In the following, as the setting history selection process, there are three music selection-related items: a melody pattern, a music list display (music selection image 83), and a music selection button effect, as in the setting item selection process described with reference to FIG. The case will be described as an example, but the music selection related items can be changed in the same manner as the setting item selection process.

<Step S4201>
In step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4201: Yes), the process shifts to step S4202, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4201: No). , The process proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off (step S4202), and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4203>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 is raised based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S4203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4204, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S4203: No), the process To step S4205.

<Step S4204>
In step S4204, in the MPU 51, as in the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. 58, whether the operated selection button 21A is either the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. In response to this, the temporary selection display change process for moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display up or down by one is executed on the setting history selection screen 96. When the process of step S4204 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S4205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4206, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S4205: No), the said The setting history selection process ends.

<Step S4206>
In step S4206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 961 (see FIG. 56) of the "melody pattern setting history" on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "melody pattern setting history". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 961 of the "melody pattern setting history" is selected (step S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4207, and the selected image 961 of the "melody pattern setting history" is not selected. If it is determined (step S4206: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4207>
When it is determined that the selected image 961 of the "melody pattern setting history" is selected (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen and sets the melody pattern from the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54 (C) and 56). The melody pattern setting history screen transition process for transitioning to the history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) is executed (step S4207). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, while setting the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4208>
In step S4208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 962 (see FIG. 56) of the “music list display setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "music list display setting history". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 962 of the "music list display setting history" is selected (step S4208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4209, and the selected image 962 of the "music list display setting history" is selected. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (step S4208: No), the process proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4209>
When it is determined that the selected image 962 of the "music list display setting history" is selected (step S4208: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen. The music list display setting history screen transition process to be migrated to 88 is executed (step S4209). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, while setting the music list display setting history screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4210>
In step S4210, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 963 (see FIG. 56) of the “music selection button effect setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is the “music selection button effect setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 963 of the "music selection button effect setting history" is selected (step S4210: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4211, and the selected image 963 of the "music selection button effect setting history" is selected. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (step S4210: No), the process proceeds to step S4212.

<Step S4211>
When it is determined that the selected image 963 of the "music selection button effect setting history" is selected (step S4210: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen. Transition to 89 (step S4211). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection history screen display flag to off, while setting the song selection button effect setting history screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4212>
In step S4212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 964 (see FIG. 56) of "back by one" on the setting history selection screen 96 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 964 of "back one" is selected (step S4212: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4213, and determines that the selected image 964 of "back one" is not selected. If this is the case (step S4212: No), the process proceeds to step S4214.

<Step S4213>
When it is determined that the selected image 964 of "back by one" is selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 (as shown in FIG. 56). Step S4213). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, while setting the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4214>
When the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than "melody pattern setting history", "music list display setting history", "music selection button effect setting history", and "back by one", the MPU 51 is used. Since it can be determined that "return to the top menu" has been selected, as shown in FIG. 56, the top menu screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S4214). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Melody pattern setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen processing (step S3418 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting history screen processing, a process of setting the melody pattern (start of music output) of the temporarily selected music and the selected music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game is executed based on the setting history. Further, FIG. 70 shows an example of the melody pattern setting history screen 87. In the following, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 will be described first with reference to FIG. 70, and then the melody pattern setting screen history processing will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

The melody pattern setting history screen 87 shown in FIG. 70 is for setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music in the jackpot game, the unselected music as the selected music, and the selected music based on the setting history. It is a screen of. On the melody pattern setting history screen 87, in addition to the setting history display image 871 and the history selection image 872 that display the melody pattern settings of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music for a plurality of times, the selected images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit Includes image 977.

The setting history display image 871 shows the histories 1 to 3 regarding the setting of the melody pattern for three times including the current melody pattern setting. The history 1 to 3 of each melody pattern setting includes information on the set time and information on the past setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music.

The history selection image 872 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the provisionally selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 1. The history 2 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the provisionally selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 2. The history 3 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the provisionally selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. Further, the histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed according to the operation of the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 provisionally selected in the history selection image 872. The histories 1 to 3 tentatively selected in the setting history display image 871 fluctuate in conjunction with the changes of to 3.

<Step S4301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 69, in step S4301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4301: Yes), the process shifts to step S4302, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4301: No). , The process proceeds to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off (step S4302), and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4303>
In step S4303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flag, a first to third lower selection operation pattern flag, a first to third left selection operation pattern flag, and a first to third right selection operation. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S4303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4304, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S4303: No), the process To step S4305.

<Step S4304>
In step S4304, the MPU 51 temporarily displays the melody pattern setting history screen 87 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. The temporary selection display change process for moving the selection display to one in any of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4304 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting history screen process.

<Step S4305>
In step S4305, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S4305: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S4305: No), the said Melody pattern setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 974 (see FIG. 70) of "back by one" on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4306: Yes), the process shifts to step S4307 and determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is not selected. If so (step S4306: No), the process proceeds to step S4308.

<Step S4307>
When it is determined that the selected image 974 of "back by one" is selected (step S4306: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54 (FIG. 54). C) and FIG. 56) are transferred to the setting history selection screen transition process (step S4307). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4308>
In step S4308, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 975 (see FIG. 70) of "return to the top menu" on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the enter button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4308: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4309 and determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If so (step S4308: No), the process proceeds to step S4310.

<Step S4309>
When it is determined that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4308: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B)). And the top menu screen transition process for transitioning to FIG. 54 (D)) (step S4309). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4310>
In step S4310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "Random" selection image 976 (see FIG. 70) of the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "Random". When the MPU 51 determines that the "Random" selected image 976 is selected (step S4310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4311 and determines that the "Random" selected image 976 is not selected (step S4310: Yes). S4310: No), the process proceeds to step S4312.

<Step S4311>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is selected (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the selected music as default (step S4311). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is the melody pattern 1 that starts the output from the chorus part for the temporarily selected song, the melody pattern 2 that starts the output from the chorus part for the unselected song, and the singing for the selected song. This is the melody pattern 1 in which the output starts from the output portion (A melody portion) (see FIG. 38).

<Step S4312>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4310: No), the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B is any of "Return by 1", "Return to top menu", and "Random". If the operation for the item does not apply, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the same setting as the setting history temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 (step S4312). For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 70, the melody pattern is set to the same settings as the history 2. That is, the melody pattern 1 that starts the output from the singing part (A melody part) for the provisionally selected music, the melody pattern 2 that starts the output from the chorus part for the unselected music, and the chorus part for the selected music. Is set to the melody pattern 2 that starts the output of.

As described above, in step S4312, the melody pattern setting history screen for setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music and setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected music and the selected music as the selected music. Since it can be performed by the player operating the selection determination unit 21 based on 87, the same effect as when the melody pattern is set according to the melody pattern setting screen 97 transitioned from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, the melody pattern (output start part) of the temporarily selected song and the selected song can be selected from the setting history, so that the melody pattern can be set to the same contents as the past settings by a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. Can be done. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can set the desired melody pattern according to the melody pattern setting history screen 87 with a small number of operations for the selection determination unit 21.

<Step S4313>
In step S4313, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the melody pattern setting flag is set to on for the items set in the melody pattern different from the default setting. For example, when a decision operation is performed on the decision button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 70, the temporary selection song melody pattern setting flag is set to on for the temporary selection song set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. The default.

<Step S4314>
In step S4314, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the melody patterns of the selected music image 831, the tentatively selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 (see FIG. 25) are set, the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen to the top menu screen. Move to 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

[Music list display setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting history screen processing (step S3420 of the game setting processing of FIG. 52). In the music list display setting history screen processing, the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game. A process of setting the display setting regarding the presence / absence (display mode) of the display based on the setting history is executed. Further, FIG. 72 shows an example of the music list display setting history screen 88. In the following, the music list display setting history screen 88 will be described first with reference to FIG. 72, and then the music list display setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

The music list display setting history screen 88 shown in FIG. 72 is for setting the presence / absence (display mode) of the music selection image 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game based on the setting history. It is a screen. On the music list display setting history screen 88, the setting history display image 881 and the history selection image 882 that display the setting of whether or not to display the disliked music (non-selected music) and the favorite music (selected music) are displayed a plurality of times, as well as the selected image. 974 to 976 and selection determination unit image 977 are included.

The setting history display image 881 shows the history 1 to 3 related to the setting for three times including the setting of whether or not to display the current non-selected music and the selected music. The history 1 to 3 of each setting includes information on the set time and information on whether or not to display the non-selected music and the selected music.

The history selection image 882 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 1. The history 2 selected image is for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 2. The history 3 selected image is for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. Further, the histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 can be changed according to the operation of the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 provisionally selected in the history selection image 882 The histories 1 to 3 tentatively selected in the setting history display image 881 fluctuate in conjunction with the changes of to 3.

<Step S4401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 71, in step S4401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4401: Yes), the process shifts to step S4402, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4401: No). , The process proceeds to step S4403.

<Step S4402>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off (step S4402), and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4403>
In step S4403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flag, a first to third lower selection operation pattern flag, a first to third left selection operation pattern flag, and a first to third right selection operation. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S4403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4404, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S4403: No), the process To step S4405.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 temporarily displays the music list display setting history screen according to whether the operated selection button 21A is the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. The temporary selection display change process for moving the selection display to one in any of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4404 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4405>
In step S4405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S4405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4406, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S4405: No), the said Music list display setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4406>
In step S4406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 72) of the “back by one” selection image 974 (see FIG. 72) of the music list display setting history screen 88 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4407 and determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is not selected. If so (step S4406: No), the process proceeds to step S4408.

<Step S4407>
When it is determined that the selected image 974 of "back by one" is selected (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (See (C) and FIG. 56) is executed (step S4407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 72) of the “return to top menu” of the music list display setting history screen 88 is selected by the operation of the enter button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4408: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4409 and determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If so (step S4408: No), the process proceeds to step S4410.

<Step S4409>
When it is determined that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B)). ) And FIG. 54 (D)), the top menu screen transition process is executed (step S4409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4410>
In step S4410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected image 976 (see FIG. 72) of “Random” on the music list display setting history screen 88 is selected by the operation of the player with respect to the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "Random". When the MPU 51 determines that the "Random" selected image 976 is selected (step S4410: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4411, and when it is determined that the "Random" selected image 976 is not selected (step S4410: Yes). S4410: No), the process proceeds to step S4412.

<Step S4411>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is selected (step S4410: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. And the display setting of the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (selected music) is set as the default (step S4411). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4412>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4410: No), that is, the operation of the player for the decision button 21B is "returns by one", "returns to the top menu", or "Random". If the operation for the item of is not applicable, the MPU 51 sets the display of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) in the setting history setting temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 (see FIG. 25). Step S4412). For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 72, the setting is the same as that for history 1. Specifically, both the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the disliked music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 corresponding to the favorite music (non-selected music) are set to be displayed.

In this way, in step S4412, the display or non-display setting of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 is displayed on the music list display setting history screen 88. Since it can be performed by the player by operating the selection determination unit 21 based on the above, the same effect as in the case of performing the display setting according to the music list display setting screen 98 transitioned from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, the display settings of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 can be selected from the setting history, so that the simple operation for the selection determination unit 21 has the same contents as the past settings. The display can be set. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired display setting according to the music list display setting history screen 88 with a small number of operations for the selection determination unit 21.

<Step S4413>
In step S4413, the MPU 51 performs the setting process of the music image non-display setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, the music image non-display setting flag is set to on for the item set to "hide" which is different from the default setting. For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 72, the settings are the same as the default settings, so that the non-selected music image non-display setting flag and the selected music image non-display setting flag are set. None of these are set to on.

<Step S4414>
In step S4414, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). .. That is, when the display settings of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

[Music selection button production setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting history screen process (step S3422 of the game setting process of FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting history screen processing, processing is executed for performing the effect execution setting related to the music selection button effect executed at the time of selecting a song in the jackpot game based on the setting history. Further, FIG. 74 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. In the following, the song selection button effect setting history screen 89 will be described first with reference to FIG. 74, and then the song selection button effect setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 shown in FIG. 74 is a screen for making settings related to the effect executed at the time of selecting music in the jackpot game based on the setting history. The song selection button effect setting history screen 89 is a setting history display image that individually displays settings for whether or not to execute the song selection button effect including the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probability variation confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect for each effect. In addition to 891 and history selection images 892, selection images 974 to 976 and selection determination unit images 977 are included.

The setting history display image 891 shows the history 1 to 3 related to the setting for three times including the setting for whether or not the current music selection button effect is executed. The history 1 to 3 of each setting includes information on the set time and information on the setting regarding whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

The history selection image 892 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 3. Further, the histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892 can be changed according to the operation of the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 provisionally selected in the history selection image 892 The histories 1 to 3 tentatively selected in the setting history display image 891 fluctuate in conjunction with the changes of to 3.

<Step S4501>
Returning to the description of FIG. 73, in step S4501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4501: Yes), the process shifts to step S4502, and when it determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4501: No). , The process proceeds to step S4503.

<Step S4502>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off (step S4502), and ends the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4503>
In step S4503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flag, a first to third lower selection operation pattern flag, a first to third left selection operation pattern flag, and a first to third right selection operation. Whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 is operated by the player based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E). To judge.

When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the selection button 21A has been performed (step S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4504, and when it is determined that the operation for the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S4503: No), the process To step S4505.

<Step S4504>
In step S4504, the MPU 51 displays the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 depending on whether the operated selection button 21A is the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. The temporary selection display change process for moving the temporary selection display to one in any of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4504 is completed, the MPU 51 ends the song selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4505>
In step S4505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed (step S4505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4506, and when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B has not been performed (step S4505: No), the said Music selection button effect setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4506>
In step S4506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 74) of "back by one" on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the decision button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is selected (step S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4507 and determines that the selected image 974 of "back one" is not selected. If so (step S4506: No), the process proceeds to step S4508.

<Step S4507>
When it is determined that the selected image 974 of "back by one" is selected (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (C) and FIG. 56), the setting history selection screen transition process (step S4507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4508>
In step S4508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 74) of "return to the top menu" on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the decision button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to the top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4508: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4509 and determines that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is not selected. If so (step S4508: No), the process proceeds to step S4510.

<Step S4509>
When it is determined that the selected image 975 of "return to the top menu" is selected (step S4508: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B). ) And (see FIG. 54 (D)), the top menu screen transition process is executed (step S4509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the song selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the song selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4510>
In step S4510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 74) of “Random” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the decision button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item tentatively selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "Random". When the MPU 51 determines that the "Random" selected image 976 is selected (step S4510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4511, and when it is determined that the "Random" selected image 976 is not selected (step S4510: Yes). S4510: No), the process proceeds to step S4512.

<Step S4511>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is selected (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect regarding whether or not the expected degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are executed as the song selection button effect. The setting is set to the default (step S4511). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4512>
When it is determined that the selected image 976 of "Random" is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, the operation of the player for the decision button 21B is "returns by one", "returns to the top menu", or "automatic". When the operation for the item of is not applicable, the MPU 51 sets the game setting regarding whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are executed to be temporarily selected (step S4512). For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 74, the setting is the same as that of the history 3. Specifically, all of the expectation suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive villa confirmation effect are set to non-execution.

As described above, in step S4512, the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be set by the player operating the selection determination unit 21 based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. Therefore, from the setting item selection screen 95. You can enjoy the same effect as when setting the effect execution according to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to be transferred. In addition, since the effect execution setting of the music selection button effect can be selected from the setting history, the effect execution setting having the same content as the past setting content can be set by a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21.

<Step S4513>
In step S4513, the MPU 51 performs the effect non-execution setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the effect non-execution setting flag is set to on for the item set to "do not execute", which is different from the default setting. For example, when the decision operation for the decision button 21B is performed in the tentative selection state shown in FIG. 74, the expected degree suggestion effect, the probability change confirmation effect, and the hold Tokurenso confirmation effect that are different from the default settings are The expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag, and the hold Tokurenso confirmation effect non-execution setting flag are all set to on.

<Step S4514>
In step S4514, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the effect execution setting for the song selection button effect is completed, the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, while setting the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

As described above, in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the player can select the music included in the selected music by operating the selection determination unit 21. It can be displayed, and by performing a determination operation on the selection determination unit 21 in this state, a previously selected selected song can be selected. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected selected music with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 and output the selected music from the speaker 26. Therefore, the game machine 10 can increase the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, the player can display the unselected music image 833 as the tentatively selected music image 832 by operating the selection determination unit 21, and by performing the determination operation on the selection determination unit 21 in this state, the previously selected music image 833 can be displayed. Unselected music that has never been played can be output from the speaker 26. Therefore, the player can select the unselected music with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 and output the unselected music from the speaker 26. As a result, the player can not only distinguish between the selected music and the unselected music, but also select either the selected music or the unselected music with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21. A desired musical piece can be easily selected and output from the speaker 26.

Further, when the music selection image 83 is displayed, the temporary music to be displayed as the temporary music image 832 is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the speaker 26. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can hear the unselected song. You can secure an opportunity to convey.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the game machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above and the same steps as the various processing procedures will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the default setting, the output start of the provisionally selected music is the chorus part for both the selected music and the unselected music, and the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (singing part) for the selected music. ), The case where the unselected music is a chorus part was explained. That is, in the first embodiment, when the tentatively selected music is selected as the selected music, the case where the selected music is output again from the verse portion (singing portion) or the chorus portion has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the selected music (temporarily selected music) is a selected music in the default setting, the selected music is selected from the continuation of the temporarily selected music output from the speaker 26 when the music is selected. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is output from the speaker 26, that is, the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26 when the selected music is selected.

By the way, in a conventional game machine, it is common that a tentatively selected song is output from the chorus part in order to effectively convey the goodness of the song, and the selected song is output from the chorus part in order to increase the degree of attention to the jackpot game. Is. In this case, when the music is selected, the temporarily selected music output at the stage of the temporary selection is interrupted once, and the chorus portion of the same music as the temporary selection music is restarted at the stage when the music is selected. Therefore, the player listens to the chorus part of the same song in a short time.

However, when the selected song is a player's favorite selected song, since this selected song is a previously selected song, by listening to the chorus part of the same song in a short time, the selected song is selected. It may also result in the tendency to get bored with. In addition, there is a concern that the tension of the player who has been raised by listening to the chorus part of the favorite song may be lowered at once because the provisionally selected song is cut off in the middle. Further, since the output start of the selected music is the chorus part, in the big hit game in which the round game (open / close execution mode) is executed about 5 times, the music start part (for example, the intro part or A) of the selected music which is the selected music is executed. You may not be able to hear the melody part (singing part).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the provisionally selected music is a selected music, the selected music is output from the verse portion (singing portion) as the provisionally selected music and is selected. If the music is a selected music, the tentatively selected music is continuously output. That is, when the selected music is selected, it is output from the music start portion at the stage of temporary selection, and even when the music is selected, the selected music is continuously output from the stage of temporary selection. Therefore, at least at the stage of temporary selection, the music start part of the selected music can be reliably heard, and the chorus part of the same music is output in duplicate in a short time from the stage of temporary selection to the stage of music selection. Therefore, even when the selected music is repeatedly selected, it is possible to prevent the selected music from getting bored at an early stage. In addition, since the selected music is continuously output from the tentative selection stage, the player can raise the tension from the music start portion to the chorus portion and maintain the tension in a high state. The interest in jackpot games will improve.

Hereinafter, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, focusing on the differences from the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the melody pattern table used in the present embodiment, and FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the provisional music output processing executed in the present embodiment. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process executed in the present embodiment. That is, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26 when the selected music is selected. Therefore, the above-mentioned first embodiment The melody pattern table shown in FIG. 75, the tentatively selected music output processing shown in FIG. 76, and the selected music output processing shown in FIG. 77 are different from each other. In the tentatively selected music output process shown in FIG. 76 and the selected music output process shown in FIG. 77, the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected music and the selected music are set differently from the default settings by the player for simplification of the explanation. If it is done, it is not considered. For example, in the temporary selection music output processing shown in FIG. 76, the step corresponding to step S2703 in the temporary selection music output processing shown in FIG. 40 is omitted in the first embodiment described above. Further, in the selected music output process shown in FIG. 77, the steps corresponding to steps S2806, S2809, and S2810 in the provisional music output process shown in FIG. 41 in the first embodiment described above are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the tentatively selected music including the initial tentatively selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that when the selected music is tentatively selected, all of the music A to T are the melody pattern 1, that is, A. The output is set to start from the melody (singing portion), and when an unselected song is tentatively selected, all of the songs A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus part. On the other hand, in the selected song, the default setting of the melody pattern is that when the selected song is selected, all of the songs A to T are set to the continuation part of the temporarily selected song, that is, the output continuation of the temporarily selected song is not set. When the selected song is selected, all of the songs A to T are set to start output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (singing portion). Here, the continuous output of the tentatively selected music means that the tentatively selected music is output without any interruption, but the moment the enter button 21B is operated, the operation sound is output momentarily. It also includes the case where the selected song is interrupted. In addition, in the embodiment other than the present embodiment, the case of continuing the output of the provisionally selected music is also interpreted as synonymous with the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the tentatively selected music is different from that of the first embodiment described above. Therefore, in the tentatively selected music output process of the present embodiment, the selected music is tentatively selected. If (step S2702: No), the default setting melody pattern 1 is unconditionally selected (step S4601), and the selected music is output from the verse part (singing part) as the temporarily selected music. (Step S2707).

As shown in FIG. 77, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the selected music is different from that of the first embodiment described above. Therefore, in the selected music output processing of the present embodiment, when the selected music is tentatively selected. (Step S2801: No), the output continuation of the provisionally selected music, which is the default setting, is unconditionally selected (step S4701), and the provisional selection that was output from the speaker 26 when the selected music is selected as the selected music. It is continuously output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the music (step S2811).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player selects the selected music, the selected music output from the music start portion as the provisional music can be listened to from the continuation of the portion output at the time of the determination operation. it can. That is, when the selected music is selected, the player can continuously listen to the selected music from the beginning of the music after the selected music is provisionally selected.

In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the tentatively selected music (continuing the tentatively selected music) on the condition that the selected music (temporarily selected music) is the selected music. When the selected music (temporarily selected music) is an unselected music, it is also conceivable to output the selected music from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the provisionally selected music (continuing the provisionally selected music). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the provisionally selected music is the verse part (singing part) in the selected music and the chorus part in the unselected music, but the output when the provisionally selected music is the selected music. The start may be the chorus part, and the output start when the tentatively selected music is an unselected music may be the verse part (singing part). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the selected music is the verse part (singing part) in the unselected music, but even if the output start in the case where the provisionally selected music is the unselected music is the chorus part. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, it is not considered that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player in the provisionally selected music output processing and the selected music output processing, but it is different from the first embodiment described above. Similarly, the provisional selection music output processing and the selection music output processing may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music and the selected music is determined depending on whether the music is a selected music or an unselected music. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the case where the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (to be exact, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the provisionally selected music and the selected music will be described.

In the present embodiment, since the melody pattern of the provisionally selected music and the selected music is determined according to the jackpot type (to be exact, the number of rounds of the jackpot game), the melody pattern table, the provisionally selected music output processing, and the selected music output are performed. The treatment is different from the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table used in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, the default setting of the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected song is that in the 5R jackpot game (5R normal jackpot game and 5R probability variation jackpot game), all of the songs A to T are from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus part. In the 16R (probability variation) jackpot game, all of the songs A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody portion (singing portion) in the 16R jackpot game. On the other hand, the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected song is that in the 5R jackpot game, all of the songs A to T are set to be the continuation part of the provisionally selected song, that is, the output of the temporarily selected song is continued, and in the 16R jackpot game, the songs A to the song. All of T are set to start output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody part (singing part). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of 5R jackpot (5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot), the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion, and when the music is selected, the provisionally selected music is continuously output. On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the tentatively selected song is output from the verse part (singing part), and the selected song is output from the verse part (singing part).

By the way, in a general game machine, as a jackpot game, a plurality of jackpot games having different advantages for the player are provided. In the present embodiment, as described above, a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, and a 16R probability variation jackpot, which have different advantages, are provided. On the other hand, as described above, in the conventional game machine, the tentatively selected music is output from the chorus part in order to effectively convey the goodness of the music, and the selected music is output from the chorus part in order to increase the attention to the jackpot game. It is common to do.

However, if the output start of both the tentatively selected music and the selected music is set to the chorus part, the tentatively selected music that was output at the stage of the tentative selection is temporarily interrupted, and the chorus part of the same music as this tentatively selected music is It will start again when the song is selected. Therefore, there is a concern that the player may feel a sense of discomfort or disgust when listening to the chorus part of the same song in a short time or when the song is interrupted. In spite of such concerns, the output of the provisionally selected song is stopped and the same song is output again as the selected song from the chorus part until the jackpot game, which has a number of rounds of about 16R and has a relatively long game time. I can't find the meaning of that.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the 5R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively short, the tentatively selected music is continuously output when the music is selected. In this way, even in the 5R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively short, the tentatively selected music can be continuously listened to as the tentatively selected music, so that the music is output at the tentative selection stage. The temporarily selected song that has been played is not interrupted once, and it is possible to avoid listening to the chorus part of the same song in a short time. As a result, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort or disgust at the fact that the chorus portion of the same music is repeatedly listened to in a short time and the music is interrupted.

On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot with a relatively long game time, the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion, and the selected music is output from the verse portion (singing portion). Therefore, in the 16R jackpot, the player can avoid listening to the chorus portion of the same song in a short time. In addition, after enjoying the chorus part as a tentatively selected song, it can be listened to from the singing part of the song as a new selected song. As a result, the player can thoroughly enjoy the 16R jackpot game, which has a relatively long playing time, from the beginning of the selected song. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or disgusted with the interruption of the music.

Here, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the provisional music output processing executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output processing executed in the present embodiment. is there. In the tentatively selected music output process shown in FIG. 79 and the selected music output process shown in FIG. 80, the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected music and the selected music are set differently from the default settings by the player for the sake of simplicity of explanation. If it is done, it is not considered.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (to be exact, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the provisionally selected music (see FIG. 78). In the selected music output process, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not the 16R jackpot is achieved. Further, the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music is determined according to the determination result in step S4801 (steps S4802 and S4804), and the tentatively selected music is output according to the determined melody pattern (steps S4803 and S4805).

Specifically, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801). Then, when it is not a 16R jackpot (step S4801: No), that is, when it is a 5R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4802), and the tentatively selected song is the verse part (singing part). Is output from (step S4803). On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot (step S4801: Yes), the melody pattern 2 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion (step S4904).

Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702), a melody pattern is randomly selected (step S4806), and a tentatively selected song is output with a melody pattern according to the selected melody pattern (step). S4807, S4803 and S4805).

Here, in order for the melody pattern to be randomly selected, it is a condition that the promotion flag is set to on (step S2701: Yes), but the promotion effect flag is not set to on in the case of a 16R jackpot. .. Therefore, since it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is a 5R jackpot when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, 5R satisfying a predetermined condition (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702) by randomly selecting a melody pattern in step S4806. Regarding the jackpot, a contradiction may occur in the melody pattern (output start part) of the provisionally selected song.

Then, when the melody pattern 2 is not selected in step S4806 (step S4807: No), that is, when the melody pattern 1 is selected, the provisionally selected music is A according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot. It is output from the melody part (singing part) (step S4803). On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected in step S4806 (step S4807: Yes), the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction is generated in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the provisionally selected music, and it is clarified in advance that the promotion effect is executed before the promotion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more accurately, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the selected music (see FIG. 78), and therefore the selected music of the present embodiment. In the output process, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not it is a 5R jackpot. Specifically, when the selected music is a selected music (step S2801: No), when the music is determined for the second time or later (step S2802: No), or when the promotion effect flag is set to off (step S2802: No). Step S2803: No), it is determined whether or not it is a 5R jackpot (step S4901). Then, in the case of a 5R jackpot (step S4901: Yes), the provisionally selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902). On the other hand, when it is not a 5R jackpot (step S4901: No), that is, when it is a 16R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the selected music is output from the verse part (singing part) ( Step S4903).

Further, when the conditions for receiving the inconsistent output lottery are satisfied (Yes in all steps of steps S2801 to S2803), the inconsistent output lottery is performed (step S2804), and the inconsistent output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the provisionally selected music is continuously output (step S4902). That is, in order to receive the inconsistent output lottery, it is a condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as described above. Since it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is a hit, if the inconsistent output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the provisionally selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902).

On the other hand, when the inconsistent output lottery is won (step S2805: Yes), the selected music is output by the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction is generated in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music, and it is clarified in advance that the promotion effect is executed before the promotion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, since the default setting of the selected music in the case of the 5R jackpot is to continue the output of the provisionally selected music, the music is the same both when the music is temporarily selected and after the music is selected during the short game time. It is avoided that the part is output and that the music is output from a different part again after the music is selected. As a result, in the case of a 5R jackpot, the music can be continuously listened to without interruption except when the inconsistent output lottery is won, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even in a short game time. On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot game state where the game time is long, the player listens to the chorus part of the provisionally selected song and then listens to the selected song, which is the same as the temporarily selected song, from the verse part (singing part). be able to. Therefore, in the 16R jackpot game state, since there is a margin in the game time, it is possible to fully enjoy the selected music from the verse part (singing part) including the chorus part of the music.

In addition, it can be determined whether or not a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the player is in a more advantageous gaming state is executed depending on whether or not there is a contradiction in the output start of the music at the time of provisional selection or selection. Therefore, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the provisionally selected music and the output start portion of the selected music. As a result, the operation of the selection button 21A of the selection determination unit 21 for temporarily selecting the music and the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 for selecting the music is not an act of simply temporarily selecting or selecting the music. , It can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in a more advantageous gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the continuation of the tentatively selected music (continuing the tentatively selected music) on the condition that it is a 5R jackpot, but when it is a 16R jackpot, the tentatively selected music is output. It is also conceivable to output the selected music from the continuation (continuing the provisionally selected music). Of course, in both the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot, the selected music may be output from the continuation of the selected music (continuing the provisional selection music). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the tentatively selected song is the chorus part at the 5R jackpot and the output start of the tentatively selected song at the 16R jackpot (singing part), but the output start of the tentatively selected song of the 5R jackpot is the verse part (singing part). ), And the output start of the provisionally selected music of the 16R jackpot may be the chorus part. Further, in the present embodiment, it is not considered that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player in the provisionally selected music output processing and the selected music output processing, but it is different from the first embodiment described above. Similarly, the provisional selection music output processing and the selection music output processing may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, as the song selection button effect process, when the promotion effect flag is set to on, the song selection button effect is performed on the condition that the unselected music is selected in the first music determination. The case where (expectation suggestion effect, probability change confirmation effect, and hold consecutive villa confirmation effect) is executed has been described (see FIG. 42).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, in addition to the condition of the first embodiment described above, a music selection operation is performed on the condition that the determination button 21B is repeatedly hit or held down in response to the music determination operation. A case where the button effect is executed will be described.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, whether or not the player has performed a determination operation for selecting a musical piece for the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) is determined by the second determination operation pattern flag (FIG. 18F). ) Is set to on (see step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39). That is, in the above-described first embodiment, it is determined that the player has performed the music determination operation on the determination button 21B by confirming that the operation on the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) has been started. .. In this way, when it is determined that the decision button 21B has been operated by the player by starting the operation on the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1), is the song selection button effect executed at the moment when the decision button 21B is operated? Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the moment when the decision button 21B is operated as to whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation on the decision button 21B is performed. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment described above, while raising the expectation that the music selection button effect will be executed within a certain period of time after the operation of the decision button 21B is started, the operation of repeatedly hitting the decision button 21B can be performed. You can enjoy long press operation. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation with respect to the decision button 21B can be enjoyed in a mode different from that of the first embodiment described above, regarding whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

Further, the symbol display unit 341 may suggest or clearly indicate to the player that the music selection button effect is executed by the continuous hitting operation or the long press operation on the decision button 21B, but such suggestion or clarification is performed. By not having it (for example, by making the display mode as shown in FIG. 25), it is possible to enjoy the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation on the decision button 21B as a so-called back command for executing the music selection button effect.

Here, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, a determination operation is performed between steps S2902 and step S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect processing of the first embodiment described above. After that, it is determined whether or not the continuous hit operation or the long press operation is performed within a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second to 20 seconds) (step S5101). Whether or not the continuous striking operation or the long press operation is performed when the determination operation is performed is determined based on the determination button operation data (see FIG. 18F). For example, in step S2606 of the music selection process of FIG. 39, when it is determined that the operation for the decision button 21B is started by confirming the on setting of the second decision operation pattern flag (step S2606: Yes), the constant It can be determined whether the determination button 21B has been repeatedly hit depending on whether the second determination operation pattern flag is turned on and off a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 30 times) within the time. Further, within the fixed time, whether the long press operation is performed depending on whether the duration in which the first determination operation pattern flag is set to be turned on reaches a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 15 seconds). Can be judged.

Then, when the continuous hit operation or the long press operation is performed within a certain period after the determination operation (step S5101: Yes), when the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), the 5R probability variation song selection button When the effect determination process is executed (step S2904) and the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2905: Yes), the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906). ..

In the present embodiment, when the unselected music is selected, the music selection button effect can be executed by the player performing a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation on the determination button 21B. Therefore, the act of selecting a musical piece can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the music selection button effect is executed by performing a continuous hit operation or a long press operation. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the music.

In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the music selection button 21B is repeatedly hit or held down in the wake of the music determination operation. This condition and the above-mentioned first embodiment are executed. The music selection button effect may be executed when any one of the conditions in the form (the operation on the decision button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, when the operation for the decision button 21B is started, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation has been performed.

Further, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not one of the continuous striking operation and the long press operation has been performed, but only the continuous striking operation for the enter button 21B or only the long press operation is the determination target in step S5101. May be.

Further, although it is determined in step S2901 whether or not the unselected music is selected, step S2901 may be omitted and the music selection button effect may be executed even when the selected music is selected. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the selected music is selected.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the promotion effect flag is set to on as the song selection button effect process, the unselected music is selected by the operation of the enter button 21B (see FIG. 1) in the first music determination. The case where the music selection button effect (expectation suggestion effect, probability change confirmation effect, and hold consecutive villa confirmation effect) is executed on condition that the music is performed has been described (see FIG. 42). Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, as the music selection button effect processing, in addition to the conditions of the first embodiment described above, a continuous hit operation or a long press operation on the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) triggered by the music determination operation. The case where the music selection button effect is executed is described on the condition that the above is performed (see FIG. 81). In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy whether the music selection button effect is executed by the operation of the decision button 21B for selecting the music.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, the unselected music is selected by operating the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) different from the decision button 21B in the first music determination. A case where the music selection button effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, both the operation for the decision button 21B and the operation for the operation button 20 are effective as the decision operation for the music selection. Specifically, in step S2606 of the music selection process of FIG. 39, the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data shown in FIG. 18A and the second determination of the decision button operation data shown in FIG. 18F. When it is confirmed that one of the operation pattern flags is set to ON, it is determined that the determination operation for music selection has been performed.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music can be selected by operating the enter button 21B as in the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above. In addition, unlike the first and fourth embodiments described above, the music can also be selected by operating the operation button 20. Then, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the operation button 20 is operated instead of the decision button 21B. That is, since the song selection button effect is executed by an operation different from that of the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, whether or not the song selection button effect is executed is determined by the above-mentioned first embodiment and the above-mentioned first embodiment. You can enjoy it differently from the fourth embodiment.

Further, the symbol display unit 341 may suggest or clearly indicate to the player that the music selection button effect is executed by the operation of the operation button 20, but by not suggesting or clearly indicating (for example,). (By using the display mode as shown in FIG. 25), the operation of determining the music by the operation button 20 can be enjoyed as a back command for executing the music selection button effect.

Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, the operation for the operation button 20 is performed between steps S2902 and step S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect processing of the first embodiment described above. It is determined whether or not the music is selected by (step S5201). Whether or not the music is selected by the operation with respect to the operation button 20 is determined by, for example, whether or not the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data is set to ON. Then, in step S5201 when it is determined that the music is selected by the operation with respect to the operation button 20 (step S5201: Yes), when the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), the 5R probability variation music selection button effect is produced. When the determination process is executed (step S2904) and the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2905: Yes), the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906).

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the player is instructed to operate the decision button 21B in order to perform the decision operation, but the decision is made for the operation button 20 different from the instructed decision button 21B. By performing the operation, the music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, the interest in the act of selecting a song is improved.

In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the music is determined by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), but in this condition and the first embodiment described above. The music selection button effect may be executed when any one of the conditions (the operation on the decision button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any of the timing when the operation on the decision button 21B is started and the timing when the operation on the operation button 20 is started.

Further, when either of the condition in the present embodiment (decision operation for the operation button 20) and the condition in the fourth embodiment described above (continuous hit operation or long press operation for the decision button 21B) are satisfied. The music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing of the timing at which the operation on the operation button 20 is started and the timing at which it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation has been performed. Of course, the music selection button effect can be executed at any timing when any of the conditions in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned conditions in the first embodiment, and the above-mentioned conditions in the fourth embodiment are satisfied. You may.

Further, instead of determining the music by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), the music selection button effect is produced when a long press operation or a continuous hit operation is performed on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). It may be possible to execute.

Further, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, it is determined in step S2901 whether or not the unselected music is selected, but step S2901 is omitted and the music selection button effect is produced even when the selected music is selected. May be executed. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the selected music is selected.

[Outline of Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below. In addition, in order to understand the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, reference numerals may be given for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to a specific configuration with the reference numerals. is not. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is
It is tentatively shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the voice output means (26). An image including a selected music image (832) and a selected music image (831) indicating that the music is already selected by a player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). Is displayed on the image display means (341).
The tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player.
When the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) is made to output the tentatively selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the tentative selection is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the music that has been played is output as a selected music from the voice output means (26).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, a selected music image indicating that the music is a selected music that has already been selected by the player as a music selection image for causing the player to select a music is used as an image display means. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can very easily find an image for selecting the selected music from the music selection images when selecting the selected music that has been selected before. Then, the player can tentatively select the selected music and display it as the tentatively selected music image by operating the operation means while confirming the position of the selected music image in the music selection image. In addition, the selected music can be output from the audio output means by performing a determination operation on the operating means in a state where the previously selected selected music is displayed as a temporary selection music image. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected selected music with a small number of operations on the operating means, and output the selected music from the voice output means.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix A2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) in a number smaller than the number of the plurality of music (for example, "20"). The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that it is displayed in (341).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, when a large number of songs are prepared so that they cannot be displayed at one time on the image display means, and a song selection image for a part of a plurality of songs is displayed. Even if there is, the selected music image for selecting the selected music is displayed, so that the selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix A3]
The effect execution means (51) is characterized in that the temporarily selected music image (832) and the selected music image (831) are identifiablely displayed on the image display means (341). The gaming machine described in A2.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally selected music image (832).

[Appendix A5]
The effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (832) in at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831) by displaying an additional image indicating that the selected music is the selected music. The gaming machine according to Appendix A3 or Appendix A4, which is displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be distinguishable from the provisionally selected music image (832).

[Appendix A6]
The effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a predetermined area in the image display means (341), thereby displaying the selected music image (832) in the provisionally selected music. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A3 to Appendix A5, characterized in that the image display means (341) is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the image (832).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A3 to A6, the selected music image is displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from the provisionally selected music image, so that it is easier to find the selected music image from the music selection images. Therefore, the convenience when temporarily selecting and selecting the selected music is further improved.

[Appendix A7]
The additional note A1 characterized in that the effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of selected music images (831) selected from two or more. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A6.

[Appendix A8]
A storage means (512) for storing the selected music information regarding the selected music is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to Appendix A7, which is characterized in that it is made to operate.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A7 and A8, the image display means displays the selected music images of the upper limit number or less selected from two or more. That is, since a plurality of selected music images can be displayed, the convenience of provisional selection and selection for a plurality of selected music that has been selected in the past is improved. On the other hand, by setting an upper limit on the number of selected music images, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of selected music images from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected selected music based on an appropriate number of selected music images, so that the operation burden when selecting the selected music is reduced.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, wherein the storage means (512) stores only the last selected song as a selected song when the song is selected a plurality of times in the special gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, when a plurality of music selections are made in the special gaming state, only the last selected music is regarded as the selected music. Therefore, even if the music is selected a plurality of times during the execution of one special game state, the final selected music is clarified and the selected music image is occupied by the selected music for one special game state. It is possible to prevent it from being done. In addition, for example, when a song once selected is not liked and another song is selected again, it is possible to prevent the song that is not liked from being displayed as a selected song image, and the reselected song is already selected. Convenience when selecting based on a music image is improved.

[Appendix A10]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in the order of newest selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A7 to Appendix A9, characterized in that it is arranged and displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image (832).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A10, in the music selection image displayed first, the selected music image for the new selected music with the selected date and time is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. Therefore, the player can easily find the most recently selected selected music when the music selection image is displayed, and can reselect the most recently selected music by the number of operations for the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operational burden when reselecting the most recently selected song, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A11]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) selects the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of frequency of selection. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A7 to Appendix A9, characterized in that it is arranged and displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A11, the selected music image for the selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. That is, the selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select the music. Therefore, the player can easily find the recently selected selected music when the music selection image is displayed, and can reselect the recently selected music with a small number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operational burden when reselecting the recently selected music, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A12]
Addendum A7 to A11, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display all of the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) as for different music. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A12, since the selected music images do not include a plurality of selected music images for the same music, even if the maximum number of displayed music images is set, the music corresponding to the maximum number of music images is set. The selected music images for the number of selected music are displayed. Therefore, the player can easily find the selected music to be selected when he / she wants to select the selected music other than the music when the same music is repeatedly selected. As a result, the player can reduce the operational burden when reselecting the previously selected song, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game accordingly.

[Appendix A13]
When the number of displayed selected music images (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit, the number of shortages of the displayed number with respect to the upper limit (for example, "1" to "3") ), The unselected music image (833) is displayed as the music selection image (83) according to any one of Supplementary A7 to Appendix A12.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A13, even if the number of selected music images to be displayed on the image display means does not reach the upper limit, the unselected music images are displayed instead of the selected music images. As a result, a predetermined number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix A14]
The effect executing means (51) is
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that the music is an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music can be further identified in the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A13, characterized in that it is displayed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A14, the player can distinguish and recognize the selected music image that has been selected before and the unselected music image that has not been selected before, so that the unselected music image can be recognized. By operating the operation means while checking, the unselected music can be tentatively selected and displayed as a tentatively selected music image. Therefore, the player can select the unselected music with a small number of operations for the operating means even when selecting the unselected music instead of the selected music, and output the unselected music from the voice output means.

[Appendix A15]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) displays the provisional music image (832) with the selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to Appendix A14, which is displayed between the selected music image (833) and the selected music image (833).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, at least at the stage when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the provisionally selected music image. Therefore, the player changes the tentatively selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means to either the selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been selected before. Even when selecting a song, the target song can be temporarily selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix A16]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) has a plurality of initial provisional music for the initial provisional music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to Appendix A14 or Appendix A15, which comprises selecting from the unselected songs of the music.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, the initial provisional music is selected from the unselected music, and the initial provisional music which is the unselected music is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can hear the unselected song. You can secure an opportunity to convey.

[Appendix A17]
Depending on whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the selected music or the unselected music, the tentatively selected music or the selected music is sounded from different parts of the tentatively selected music or the selected music. Output means (26) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A14 to Appendix A16, which is characterized by outputting.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A17, by performing a determination operation on the operation means while displaying the unselected music as a tentatively selected music image, the unselected music that has not been selected before can be selected as the selected music. It is possible to output to the audio output means from a different part of the music from the case of selecting. As a result, the player can listen to the selected music from different parts depending on whether the selected music is selected or the unselected music is selected. Therefore, the player can output the selected music or not select the selected music. You can enjoy it differently than when you output music.

[Appendix A18]
When the tentatively selected music is the selected music, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the music start portion of the selected music, and the tentatively selected music is not. The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected music from the chorus portion when the music is selected.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, the player can listen to the tentatively selected music from the beginning of the music when it is a selected music, while the player can listen to it from the beginning of the music when the tentatively selected music is an unselected music. You can hear from the part. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start portion of the previously selected music with respect to the provisionally selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the chorus part with the highest excitement in the music, so it is judged whether or not the tentatively selected music is the music of his choice. It will be easier.

[Appendix A19]
When the selected music is the selected music, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music from the music start portion, and the selected music is the unselected music. In the case of the above, the gaming machine according to the appendix A17 or the appendix A18, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected music from the chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, the player can listen to the selected music from the music start portion when the selected music is the selected music, while the player can listen to the selected music from the chorus part when the selected music is the unselected music. You can listen. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start portion of the previously selected music with respect to the selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the chorus part with the highest excitement in the music, so it is easy to judge whether the music selected this time is the music of his choice. Become.

[Appendix A20]
The operating means (21) is operated by the player when making settings related to the effect in the special gaming state.
A display setting means (51) for setting whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to a setting operation for the operation means (21) by the player is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is
A display setting screen that allows the player to set whether or not to display the selected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21). Move to (88,98)
When the display setting means (51) is operated by the operation means (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88,98), the setting operation is performed by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A19, wherein the display setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix A20, since it is possible to set whether to display the selected music image included in the music selection image, the music selection image is displayed on the image display means in a display mode suitable for the player's preference. be able to. As a result, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image of the display mode set by himself / herself. In addition, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the selected music image when the music selection image includes the selected music image for the selected music that the previous player has selected in the past. be able to.

[Appendix A21]
A display setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding the setting history for the display setting is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) responds to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player, and serves as the display setting screens (88,98) in the image display means (341), such as the display setting storage means (512). ) Is displayed, and the display setting history screen (88) that displays the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in) is displayed.
When the display setting means (51) is the display setting history screen (88) and the player performs a setting operation for setting the display based on the setting history image (881), the game The gaming machine according to Appendix A20, wherein the display setting of the contents set by the person is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A21, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting contents by performing the setting operation for the operating means when the display screen in the image display means is the display setting history screen. Can be done. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operating means.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image showing a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, the player can distinguish between the setting history of the player who has played the game before and his / her own setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting the desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix A23]
Output for which the output start setting of the provisionally selected music or the output start portion of the selected music is performed from any of a plurality of predetermined output start parts according to the setting operation for the operation means (21) by the player. Further equipped with a start setting means (51),
The effect executing means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
When the display screen is the output start setting screen (87,97), the output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A22, characterized in that when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music or the selected music is performed according to the setting content set by the player. ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, since the output start portion of the provisionally selected music or the selected music can be set, the provisionally selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output means from the portion according to the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, the player can start the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the portion that suits his / her taste. Here, the music start portion or the chorus portion is characteristic as compared with other portions such as the B melody portion of the music. Therefore, the player selects the tentatively selected music or the portion for starting the output of the selected music from the music start portion and the chorus part, thereby selecting whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a previously selected music. It is easy to judge whether the song is a song that you did not play or a song that you have never heard before.

[Appendix A25]
An output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding the setting history for the output start setting is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87,97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. The output start setting history screen (87) displaying the setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512) is displayed.
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the setting history image (871). In the case, the gaming machine according to Appendix A23 or Appendix A24, characterized in that the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A25, when the display screen in the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation for the operation means to output the same contents as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means when he / she wants to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A 25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (871) including an image showing a set time on the output start setting history screen (87).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A26, the player can distinguish between the setting history of the player who has previously played the game and his / her own setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting the desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix B1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection information storage means (512) for storing music selection information related to music selection by a player, and
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the voice output means (26). The tentatively selected music image (832) is identifiablely displayed on the image display means (341).
The tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player.
When the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) is made to output the tentatively selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the tentative selection is performed. The music that has been selected is output as a selected music from the audio output means (26).
The music selection information storage means includes provisional music information related to the provisional music as the music selection information, and selected music that has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). The selected music information related to the selected music and the unselected music information related to the unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music are stored.
The unselected music information is the initial tentative music image of the initial tentative music corresponding to the initial tentative music image first displayed on the image display means (341) as the tentative music image (832). A gaming machine characterized in that it includes non-selected music information relating to a non-selected music that has not been selected by the player at the stage displayed on the image display means (341).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the non-selected music information regarding the non-selected music is stored in the music selection information storage means. Therefore, based on the non-selected music information, the player can be made to recognize the information about the non-selected music through the production means such as the image display means. As a result, the player can recognize which of the plurality of songs is the non-selected song, and therefore, despite being displayed as the initial provisionally selected song image on the image display means (341), the player can recognize which is the non-selected song. This frees you from the hassle of tentatively selecting or selecting a non-selected song that the player did not select.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix B2]
An information updating means (51) for updating the music selection information stored in the music selection information storage means (512) is further provided.
The information updating means (51) is characterized in that, when the selected music is the non-selected music, the information updating means (51) executes an update that clears information about the music corresponding to the selected music from the non-selected music information. The gaming machine described in B1.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, since the non-selected music is treated as other music by selecting the non-selected music, the music selected by the player is displayed on the image display means as the non-selected music image. It is avoided that it continues to be done. As a result, the player can prevent the previously selected song from being mistaken as a non-selected song and unintentionally avoiding the selection of the song.

[Appendix B3]
The information updating means (51) is characterized in that, when the selected music is the non-selected music, the information updating means (51) executes an update in which the selected music information includes information about a music corresponding to the selected music. The gaming machine described in B2.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, in addition to being able to prevent the previously selected song from being mistaken as a non-selected song, the selected song corresponding to the selected song is treated as the selected song. The image will be displayed on the image display means. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the selection of the music from being unintentionally avoided.

[Appendix B4]
The effect executing means (51) is
As the music selection image (83), at least the provisional music image (832), the selected music image (831) indicating that the music is selected, and the unselected music indicating that the music is not selected. The image (833) and the image (833) are displayed on the image display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B3, wherein the unselected music image (833) includes an identifiable non-selected music image (834) indicating that the music is a non-selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, since the image including the non-selected music image is displayed as the unselected music image, the player does not select the image even though it was first displayed as the provisionally selected music image in the past. Since the non-selected music can be distinguished from other music, the player can more surely avoid tentatively selecting the non-selected music against his / her will. In addition, by displaying the non-selected music image, it is possible to avoid the non-selected music and search for a new favorite music. Therefore, even if the music selection is limited to a relatively short time, the time limit can be set. You can use it effectively to search for new songs you like.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the selected music image and the unselected music are displayed as the music selection images, so that the player can not only recognize the selected music and the unselected music separately, but also select the selected music. Regardless of whether the music or the unselected music is selected, the target music can be easily and efficiently selected with a small number of operations for the operating means and output from the audio output means.

[Appendix B5]
The effect executing means (51) has a predetermined upper limit number of pre-non-selected music images (831) selected from two or more numbers based on the non-selected music information stored in the music selection information storage means. ) Is displayed on the image display means (341), according to the appendix B4.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, by setting an upper limit on the number of non-selected music images, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of non-selected music images from being displayed, and unnecessarily select non-selected music images. The risk can be further reduced.

[Appendix B6]
The effect executing means (51) arranges and displays the non-selected music images (834) for the upper limit number of the non-selected music at positions farther from the tentatively selected music images (832) in the order of newest non-selected date and time. The gaming machine according to Appendix B5, characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the non-selected music image for the new non-selected music with the non-selected date and time is displayed at a distant position of the provisionally selected music image, so the non-selected music that was not selected most recently is selected. You can reduce the risk of losing music.

[Appendix B7]
The effect executing means (51) is
A predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) in a number smaller than the number of the plurality of music (for example, "20").
In the initial music selection image (83) to be first displayed on the image display means (341), the non-selection music image (834) is not displayed on the image display means (341), and the player operates the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B4 to B6, wherein the non-selected music image (834) is displayed on the image display means (341) according to the above.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image first displayed on the image display means. On the other hand, the non-selected music is unlikely to be selected by the player. Therefore, by not displaying the non-selected music image in the initial music selection image, the unselected music (excluding the non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than the non-selected music is more likely to be selected in the initial music selection image. Many can be displayed. As a result, the time required to select a song from unselected songs other than the non-selected song can be reduced, and the stress given to the player in the song selection can be reduced. On the other hand, since the player can display the non-selected music image by operating the operation means, it is also possible to select a music from the non-selected music.

[Appendix B8]
An initial music arrangement determining means (51) for determining the initial arrangement of the plurality of music in order to display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341) is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the music selection image (83) according to the initial arrangement determined by the initial music arrangement determination means (51).
The initial music sequence determining means (51) does not select the non-selected music at a position in the initial arrangement where the minimum number of operations with respect to the operating means (21) required to make the non-selected music into the provisional music is the largest. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B4 to B7, which comprises arranging music.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B8, the minimum number of operations for the operating means required for the non-selected music that is unlikely to be selected by the player (the player is likely to avoid selection) as the provisional music. Are arranged in the position where is the most. Therefore, similarly to the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, more unselected songs (excluding non-selected songs) that are more likely to be selected by the player than non-selected songs can be displayed in the initial music selection image. it can. As a result, the time required to select a song from unselected songs other than the non-selected song can be reduced, and the stress given to the player in the song selection can be reduced.

[Appendix B9]
The operating means (21) is operated by the player when making settings related to the effect in the special gaming state.
A display setting means (51) for setting whether or not to display the unselected music image (834) in response to a setting operation for the operation means (21) by the player is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is
A display setting screen that allows the player to set whether or not to display the unselected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21). Move to (88,98)
When the display setting means (51) is operated by the operation means (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88,98), the setting operation is performed by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B4 to B8, wherein the display setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, the player can select whether or not to display the non-selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, when the music selection image includes a non-selected music image for a non-selected music that the previous player did not select in the past, the player selects a music selection image that does not include the non-selected music image. It can be displayed.

[Appendix B10]
A display setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding the setting history for the display setting is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) responds to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player, and serves as the display setting screens (88,98) in the image display means (341), such as the display setting storage means (512). ) Is displayed, and the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in) is displayed.
When the display setting means (51) is the display setting history screen (88) and the player performs a setting operation to perform the display setting based on the setting history image (881), the display setting means (51) is used. The gaming machine according to Appendix B9, wherein the display setting of the contents set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B10, when the display screen in the image display means is the display setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation for the operation means to perform the same display setting as the past setting contents. Can be done. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operating means.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image showing a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B11, the player can distinguish between the setting history of the player who has played the game before and his / her own setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting the desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix B12]
When the music selection image (83) is first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) first displays the music selection image (832) as the initial music selection image (832). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note B1 to Supplementary note B11, characterized in that the initial tentatively selected music for 832) is selected from the unselected music and the initial tentatively selected music is output from the audio output means (26). ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, when the music selection image is displayed, the initial temporary music to be displayed as the temporary music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. To. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can hear the unselected song as the initial tentatively selected song in the process up to that point, and the player can hear the unselected song. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs.

[Appendix B13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B12, wherein the effect executing means (51) selects the initial provisionally selected music from songs other than the non-selected music among the unselected songs.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B13, when displaying the music selection image, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from the unselected music other than the non-selected music. Therefore, the player selects the non-selected music that was previously selected by the effect executing means as the tentatively selected music but was not selected by the player, and is displayed as the initial tentatively selected music image. You will be freed from the hassle of doing things.

[Appendix C1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the voice output means (26). The tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341).
The tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player.
When the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) is made to output the tentatively selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the tentative selection is performed. The music that has been selected is output as a selected music from the audio output means (26).
Depending on whether the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a selected song that has already been selected by the player or an unselected song other than the selected song, the tentatively selected song or the selected song. A gaming machine characterized in that the tentatively selected music or the selected music is output to the audio output means (26) from different portions of the above.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the music start portion when the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the selected music. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized by the above.

[Appendix C3]
The effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the chorus portion when the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, which is a feature.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices C1 to C3, the selected music is output from different parts of the music depending on whether the selected music is provisionally selected or selected and the unselected music is temporarily selected or selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the tentatively selected music or the selected music from different parts depending on whether the selected music is tentatively selected or selected and the tentatively selected or unselected music is selected. For example, if the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a selected song, the selected song can be heard from the beginning of the song, and if the tentatively selected song or the selected song is an unselected song, the unselected song is chorused. You can hear from the part. Therefore, the selected music that has heard the chorus part before can be enjoyed from the music start part. On the other hand, for a song that has not been selected before, the chorus part with the highest excitement of the song can be heard, so it becomes easy to judge whether the song is a favorite song.

[Appendix C4]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) first displays the music selection image (832) as the initial music selection image (832). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C3, wherein the initial provisionally selected music for) is selected from the unselected music among the plurality of music.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the effect executing means (51) outputs the initial provisionally selected music from a chorus portion to the voice output means (26).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C4 and the appendix C5, when the music selection image is displayed, the tentatively selected music to be displayed as the tentatively selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is, for example, a chorus portion. Is output by the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point. In particular, when the initial provisionally selected music is output from the chorus part, the chorus part with the highest excitement of the unselected music can be heard without fail, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

[Appendix C6]
Output for which the output start setting of the provisionally selected music or the output start portion of the selected music is performed from any of a plurality of predetermined output start parts according to the setting operation for the operation means (21) by the player. Further equipped with a start setting means (51),
The effect executing means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
When the display screen is the output start setting screen (87,97), the output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C5, characterized in that when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music or the selected music is performed according to the setting content set by the player. ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C6, since the output start portion of the provisionally selected music or the selected music can be set, the provisionally selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output means from the part according to the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C7, the player can start the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the portion that suits his / her taste. Here, the music start portion or the chorus portion is characteristic as compared with other portions such as the B melody portion of the music. Therefore, the player selects the tentatively selected music or the portion for starting the output of the selected music from the music start portion and the chorus part, thereby selecting whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a previously selected music. It is easy to judge whether the song is a song that you did not play or a song that you have never heard before.

[Appendix C8]
An output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information related to the output start setting history for the output start setting is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87,97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. The output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512) is displayed on the output start setting history screen (87).
The output start setting means (51) is an operation in which the player performs the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). If this is done, the gaming machine according to Appendix C6 or Appendix C7, wherein the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C8, when the display screen in the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation for the operation means to output the same contents as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means when he / she wants to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix C9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C8, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image showing a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C9, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who has played the game before and the output start setting history of the player by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix D1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the voice output means (26). The tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341).
The tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player.
When the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) is made to output the tentatively selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the tentative selection is performed. The music that has been selected is output as a selected music from the audio output means (26).
A gaming machine characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the provisionally selected music output from the audio output means (26) is continuously output at the timing when the determination operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the provisionally selected music is continuously output when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the selected music is continuously output from the tentative selection stage, so that the same part of the music is duplicated and output in a short time from the tentative selection stage to the music selection stage. It is prevented from being done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or disgusted by listening to the chorus portion of the same song in a short time and interrupting the song.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the selected music is the selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, when the provisionally selected music is a selected music, the selected music is continuously output from the stage of the provisional selection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent duplicate output of the chorus part of the same song in a short time from the tentative selection stage to the song selection stage, so even when repeatedly selecting a selected song, you get bored early. It can be suppressed from being stored.

[Appendix D3]
When the tentatively selected music is the selected music, the effect executing means (51) supplies the audio output means (26) with a music start portion (for example, a singing portion (A melody portion)) of the selected music. The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, characterized in that output is performed from the intro portion (prelude portion)).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, when the tentatively selected music is a selected music, the selected music is output from the music start portion, and when the selected music is a selected music, the tentatively selected music continues. Is output. That is, when the selected music is selected, it is output from the music start portion at the stage of temporary selection, and even when the music is selected, the selected music is continuously output from the stage of temporary selection. Therefore, not only is it possible to prevent duplicate output of the chorus part of the same song in a short time from the selection stage to the song selection stage, but also at least the music start part of the selected song is output at the tentative selection stage. You can definitely listen to it. Further, since the selected music is continuously output from the stage of provisional selection, the player can raise the tension from the music start portion to the chorus portion and maintain the tension in a high state.

[Appendix D4]
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and a second special gaming state (16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) in which the gaming time is longer than that of the first special gaming state. Including
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming state is the first special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, in the first special gaming state in which the gaming time is short, the player performs the determination operation on the provisionally selected music output from the voice output means at the timing when the determination operation is performed. You can continue to listen to the part that was output when it was broken. That is, in the first special gaming state, the same part of the music is output both when the music is provisionally selected and after the music is selected during the short game time, and the music is output from a different part again after the music is selected. Is avoided. As a result, the music can be continuously listened to within a short game time, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even in a short game time.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D4, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the provisionally selected music from a chorus portion in the first special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, in the first special gaming state, the player can hear the chorus part having the highest excitement about the provisionally selected music, so that the player can provisionally listen to the chorus part even if the playing time is short. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the selected song. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the chorus part of the tentatively selected song, it becomes easy to judge whether the tentatively selected song is a song of his / her own taste or a previously selected and favorite song. Further, by outputting the provisionally selected music from the chorus portion when the gaming state is the first special gaming state, the player can surely listen to the chorus portion after the provisional selection and after the selection of the music, and also the chorus. You can listen to music continuously from the part without stress.

[Appendix D6]
In the second special gaming state, when the determination operation is performed, the effect executing means (51) causes the selected music to be transmitted to the voice output means (26) at a music start portion (for example, a singing portion (A melody portion)). ), The gaming machine according to Appendix D4 or Appendix D5, which is characterized by outputting from the intro portion (prelude portion)).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the provisionally selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special gaming state in which the gaming time is long, the player can listen to the music output from the audio output means again from the music start portion when the determination operation is performed. That is, in the second special gaming state, since there is a margin in the playing time, it is possible to fully enjoy the music from the beginning of the music, including the chorus part of the music.

[Appendix D7]
The effect executing means (51) is any of the appendices D4 to D6, characterized in that, in the second special gaming state, the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music from the music start portion. Described gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D7, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the provisionally selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special gaming state in which the gaming time is long, the player can listen to the music output from the audio output means again from the music start portion when the determination operation is performed. That is, in the second special gaming state, since there is a margin in the playing time, it is possible to fully enjoy the music from the beginning of the music, including the chorus part of the music. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the first special gaming state, the provisionally selected music is output from the music start portion as described above. Therefore, the player can determine whether the gaming state is the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state, depending on whether the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion or the music start portion. is there. Further, the game time is different between the first special game state and the second special game state, and generally, the longer the game time, the higher the expected game value tends to be. Therefore, the player can enjoy paying attention to the output start portion of the tentatively selected music in order to determine whether or not the second special gaming state is more generally advantageous for the player.

[Appendix D8]
The effect executing means (51) is a selected song indicating that the song selection image (83) is a song that has already been selected by the player as a song to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D7, wherein the music image (831) is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D8, the player temporarily selects the selected music and displays it as the temporarily selected music image by operating the operation means while confirming the position of the selected music image in the music selection image. Can be made to. In addition, the selected music can be output from the audio output means by performing a determination operation on the operating means in a state where the previously selected selected music is displayed as a temporary selection music image. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected selected music with a small number of operations on the operating means, and output the selected music from the voice output means.

[Appendix D9]
The effect executing means (51) is
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that the music is an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music can be further identified in the image display means (341). Display,
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the plurality of initial music selection songs for the initial music selection music image (832) to be displayed first as the music selection music image (832). The gaming machine according to Appendix D8, wherein the music is selected from the unselected music.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D9, when displaying the music selection image, the tentatively selected music to be displayed as the tentatively selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. .. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can hear the unselected song. You can secure an opportunity to convey.

[Appendix D10]
The operating means (21) is operated by the player when making settings related to the effect in the special gaming state.
An output start setting means (output start setting means for setting whether to start the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the music start portion or the chorus portion according to the setting operation for the operation means (21) by the player. 51) further equipped,
The effect executing means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
When the display screen is the output start setting screen (87,97), the output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D9, wherein when an operation is performed, the output start setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D10, the player can set the provisional selection music or the output start of the selected music. Therefore, the player can output the tentatively selected music or the selected music from his / her favorite part by setting the output start portion.

[Appendix D11]
An output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information related to the output start setting history for the output start setting is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87,97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. The screen shifts to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871B) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512).
The output start setting means (51) is an operation in which the player performs the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871B) when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). The gaming machine according to Appendix D10, wherein the output start setting of the contents set by the player is performed when the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D11, when the display screen in the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation for the operation means to output the same contents as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous output start setting, the player can perform the desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix D12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D11, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays an output start setting history image (871B) including an image showing a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix D12, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who has previously played the game and his / her own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix E1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the voice output means (26). The tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341).
The tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player.
When the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) is made to output the tentatively selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the tentative selection is performed. The music that has been selected is output as a selected music from the audio output means (26).
When the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the tentatively selected music has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). If it is an unselected music other than the selected music, the audio output means (26) is made to output the unselected music from the chorus portion.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the selected music is the unselected music, the voice output means (26) outputs the unselected music from a music start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion, and the selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, when an unselected song that has not been selected before is selected, the player can hear the music start part and the chorus part of the unselected song, so that the player can sufficiently appreciate the goodness of the unselected song. Can be told to. On the other hand, the player does not listen to the chorus part that has already been output at the stage of temporary selection in a short time, and even if the time required for the special game is short, the player can listen to the unselected music that is the selected music. After selecting a song, you can listen to it from the beginning of the song, and you can check again whether the unselected song suits your taste.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game and improving the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix E2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) in a number smaller than the number of the plurality of music (for example, "20"). The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that it is displayed in (341).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, there are so many songs that cannot be displayed at once on the image display means, and a song selection image for some of the songs is displayed. Even if there is, the selected music image for selecting the selected music is displayed, so that the selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix E3]
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to distinguish between the provisionally selected music image (832) and the selected music image (831) indicating that the music is temporarily selected. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1 or Appendix E2, which comprises the above.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E3, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally selected music image (832).

[Appendix E5]
The effect execution means (51) is described in Appendix E3 or Appendix E4, wherein an additional image indicating that the selected music is displayed is displayed on at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831). Game machine.

[Appendix E6]
The effect execution means (51) is described in any one of Supplementary Provisions E3 to E5, characterized in that the selected music image (831) is displayed in a predetermined area in the image display means (341). Game machine.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices E3 to E6, the selected music image is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the provisionally selected music image, so that it is easier to find the selected music image from the music selection images. Therefore, the convenience when temporarily selecting and selecting the selected music is further improved.

[Appendix E7]
Appendix E3, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of selected music images (831) selected from two or more. The gaming machine described in any of Appendix E6.

[Appendix E8]
A storage means (512) for storing the selected music information regarding the selected music is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to Appendix E7, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix E7 and the appendix E8, in the special gaming state, a music selection image including a selected music image of not more than the upper limit number selected from two or more is displayed in the image display means. That is, a plurality of selected music images can be displayed. Further, by setting an upper limit on the number of selected music images, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of selected music images from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected selected music based on an appropriate number of selected music images, so that the operation burden when selecting the selected music is reduced.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E8, wherein when the music is selected a plurality of times in the special gaming state, the storage means (512) sets only the last selected music as the selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E9, when the music is selected a plurality of times in the special gaming state, only the last selected music is regarded as the selected music. Therefore, even if the music is selected a plurality of times during the execution of one special game state, the final selected music is clarified and the selected music image is occupied by the selected music for one special game state. It is possible to prevent it from being done. In addition, for example, when a song once selected is not liked and another song is selected again, it is possible to prevent the song that is not liked from being displayed as a selected song image, and the reselected song is already selected. Convenience when selecting based on a music image is improved.

[Appendix E10]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) provisionally displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in the order of newest selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E7 to E9, characterized in that it is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image (832).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E10, in the music selection image displayed first, the selected music image for the new selected music with the selected date and time is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. Therefore, the player can easily find the most recently selected selected music when the music selection image is displayed, and can reselect the most recently selected music by the number of operations for the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operational burden when reselecting the most recently selected song, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E11]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) provisionally selects the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of frequency of selection. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E7 to E9, characterized in that it is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E11, the selected music image for the selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. That is, the selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select the music. Therefore, the player can easily find the recently selected selected music when the music selection image is displayed, and can reselect the recently selected music with a small number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operational burden when reselecting the recently selected music, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E12]
The effect executing means (51) is characterized in that the image display means (341) displays all of the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) as for different music. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E12, since the selected music images do not include a plurality of selected music images for the same music, even if the maximum number of displayed music images is set, the music corresponding to the maximum number of music images is set. The selected music images for the number of selected music are displayed. Therefore, the player can easily find the selected music to be selected when he / she wants to select the selected music other than the music when the same music is repeatedly selected. As a result, the player can reduce the operational burden when reselecting the previously selected song, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game accordingly.

[Appendix E13]
When the number of displayed selected music images (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit, the number of shortages of the displayed number with respect to the upper limit (for example, "1" to "3") ), The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E7 to E12, characterized in that the unselected music image (833) is displayed as the music selection image (83) indicating that the music is the unselected music. ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E13, even if the number of selected music images to be displayed on the image display means does not reach the upper limit, the unselected music images are displayed instead of the selected music images. As a result, a predetermined number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix E14]
The effect executing means (51) is
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that it is the unselected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E13.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E14, the player can distinguish and recognize the selected music image that has been selected before and the unselected music image that has not been selected before, so that the unselected music image can be recognized. By operating the operation means while checking, the unselected music can be tentatively selected and displayed as a tentatively selected music image. Therefore, the player can select the unselected music with a small number of operations for the operating means even when selecting the unselected music instead of the selected music, and output the unselected music from the voice output means.

[Appendix E15]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) displays the provisional music image (832) with the selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to Appendix E14, which is displayed between the selected music image (833) and the selected music image (833).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E15, at least at the stage when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the provisionally selected music image. Therefore, the player changes the tentatively selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means to either the selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been selected before. Even when selecting a song, the target song can be temporarily selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix E16]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) has a plurality of initial provisional music for the initial provisional music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E15, which comprises selecting from the unselected songs among the songs of the above.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E16, the initial tentatively selected music is selected from the unselected music, and the initial tentatively selected music which is the unselected music is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected song in the process up to that point, and the player can hear the unselected song. You can secure an opportunity to convey.

[Appendix E17]
Depending on whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the selected music or the unselected music, the tentatively selected music or the selected music is voiced from different parts of the tentatively selected music or the selected music. Output means (26) The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E16, which is characterized by outputting.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E17, by performing a determination operation on the operation means while displaying the unselected music as a tentatively selected music image, the unselected music that has not been selected before can be selected as the selected music. It is possible to output to the audio output means from a different part of the music from the case of selecting. As a result, the player can listen to the selected music from different parts depending on whether the selected music is selected or the unselected music is selected. Therefore, the player can output the selected music or not select the selected music. You can enjoy it differently than when you output music.

[Appendix E18]
Note E17, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the music start portion of the selected music when the provisionally selected music is the selected music. Described gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E18, the player can listen to the tentatively selected music from the beginning of the music when it is a selected music, while the player can listen to it from the beginning of the music when the tentatively selected music is an unselected music. You can hear from the part. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start portion of the previously selected music with respect to the provisionally selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the chorus part with the highest excitement in the music, so it is judged whether or not the tentatively selected music is the music of his choice. It will be easier.

[Appendix E19]
When the selected music is the selected music, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music from the music start portion, and the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to Appendix E17 or Appendix E18, wherein the unselected music is output from the chorus portion to the audio output means (26) in a certain case.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E19, the player can listen to the selected music from the music start portion when the selected music is the selected music, while the player can listen to the selected music from the chorus part when the selected music is the unselected music. You can listen. Therefore, the player can enjoy the music from the start portion of the previously selected music with respect to the selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the chorus part with the highest excitement in the music, so it is easy to judge whether the music selected this time is the music of his choice. Become.

[Appendix E20]
The operating means (21) is operated by the player when making settings related to the effect in the special gaming state.
A display setting means (51) for setting whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to a setting operation for the operation means (21) by the player is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is
A display setting screen that allows the player to set whether or not to display the selected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21). Move to (88,98)
The display setting means (51) is a case where the player performs the setting operation by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen shifts to the display setting screens (88,98). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E3 to E13, characterized in that the display setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E20, it is possible to set whether to display a specific image included in the music selection image, so that the music selection image can be displayed on the image display means in a display mode that suits the player's preference. it can. As a result, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image of the display mode set by himself / herself. In addition, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the selected music image when the music selection image includes the selected music image for the selected music that the previous player has selected in the past. be able to.

[Appendix E21]
A display setting storage means (512) capable of storing display setting history information related to the display setting history for the display setting is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) responds to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player, and serves as the display setting screens (88,98) in the image display means (341), such as the display setting storage means (512). The display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the display setting history information stored in) is transferred to the display setting history screen (88).
When the display setting means (51) is the display setting history screen (88) and the player performs a setting operation to perform the display setting based on the display setting history image (881). , The gaming machine according to Appendix E20, characterized in that the display setting of the contents set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E21, when the display screen in the image display means is the display setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation for the operation means to perform the same display setting as the past setting contents. Can be done. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operating means.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E21, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the display setting history image (881) including an image showing a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E22, the player can distinguish between the display setting history of the player who has played the game before and his / her own display setting history by referring to the set time. When there is a display setting history to be selected in the own display setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting the desired display setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix E23]
Output for which the output start setting of the provisionally selected music or the output start portion of the selected music is performed from any of a plurality of predetermined output start parts according to the setting operation for the operation means (21) by the player. Further equipped with a start setting means (51),
The effect executing means (51) displays an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting on the display screen of the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
When the display screen is the output start setting screen (87,97), the output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21). The game according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E22, wherein when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music or the selected music is performed according to the setting content set by the player. Machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E23, since the output start portion of the provisionally selected music or the selected music can be set, the provisionally selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output means from the portion according to the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix E24]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E24, the player can start the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the portion that suits his / her taste. Here, the music start portion or the chorus portion is characteristic as compared with other portions such as the B melody portion of the music. Therefore, the player selects the tentatively selected music or the portion for starting the output of the selected music from the music start portion and the chorus part, thereby selecting whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a previously selected music. It is easy to judge whether the song is a song that you did not play or a song that you have never heard before.

[Appendix E25]
An output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information related to the output start setting history for the output start setting is further provided.
The effect executing means (51) is the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screen (87,97) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. The screen shifts to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512).
The output start setting means (51) is an operation in which the player performs the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). If so, the gaming machine according to Appendix E23 or Appendix E24, wherein the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E25, when the display screen in the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation for the operation means to output the same contents as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means when he / she wants to return to the previous setting.

[Appendix E26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image showing a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E26, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who has previously played the game and his / her own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix F1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is
It is shown that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by the player for selecting a music to be output by the voice output means (26). The tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341).
The tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) is changed according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player.
When the tentatively selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) is made to output the tentatively selected music, and when the determination operation is performed, the tentative selection is performed. The music that has been selected is output as a selected music by the audio output means (26).
The audio output means (26) starts the output of the tentatively selected music or the selected music from the first part of the plurality of predetermined output start parts.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied on the condition that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means, the audio output means (26) has the plurality. A gaming machine characterized in that the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music is started from a second portion of the output start portion of the above, which is different from the first portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first part, but in the gaming situation where the actual gaming situation is more advantageous to the player than the gaming situation suggested by the directing means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the second part different from the first part. That is, the player can output the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second part different from the first part, so that the current game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the directing means. You can know that it is a situation. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting a musical piece is not merely the act of temporarily selecting or selecting a musical piece, but in a game situation in which the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the directing means. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm whether or not there is. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to positively tentatively select or select the music, and to actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming states include a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the probability that the game state is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the main control means (41) is higher than that of the first gaming state. Including the special gaming state
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state in which the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Including the second special gaming state to be transferred
The effect executing means (51) is the provisionally selected music on the condition that the game state suggested by the effect means is the first special game state and the actual game state is the second special game state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, wherein the selected music is output from the second portion to the voice output means (26).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix F2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special gaming state, the selected music is output from the second part. That is, the player is in a second special gaming state in which the current special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state because the selected music is output from the second part when the music is selected. You can get to know that. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting a musical piece is not merely an act of selecting a musical piece, but an act of confirming whether or not it is a second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. Can be done. As a result, the player can be motivated to positively select the music, and the player can be actively participated in the special game.

[Appendix F3]
The effect executing means (51) has already selected the tentatively selected music or the selected music as a music to be output by the audio output means (26) among the plurality of music. The gaming machine according to Appendix F1 or Appendix F2, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second portion on condition that the music is an unselected music other than the music. ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F3, the selected music is output from the second part on the condition that the provisionally selected music or the selected music is an unselected music in the second special gaming state. That is, when the unselected music is provisionally selected or selected, the player outputs the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second part, so that the actual game situation is more than the game situation suggested by the production means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous for the person. Therefore, the operation for tentatively selecting or selecting a musical piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply tentatively selecting or selecting a musical piece, but as an act of confirming whether or not the game situation is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to positively temporarily select or select the unselected music so that the player can listen to the unselected music, and it is possible to secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player.

[Appendix F4]
When the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the unselected music, the first part of the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a chorus part, and the second part of the tentatively selected music or the selected music is. The gaming machine according to Appendix F3, which is the beginning of a musical piece.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F4, the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the second because the first part is the chorus part and the second part is the music starting part clearly different from the first part. When it is output from the part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F5]
When the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the unselected music, the first part of the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a music start portion, and the second part of the tentatively selected music or the selected music. Is a gaming machine according to Appendix F3, which is characterized by being a rust portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F5, the first part is the music start part, while the second part is the chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the second part. When it is output from the part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F6]
The effect executing means (51) is the condition that the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a selected music that has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Appendix F1 or Appendix F2, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F6, even when the selected music is tentatively selected or selected, the tentatively selected music or the selected music is output from the second part. That is, when the selected music is temporarily selected or selected, the player outputs the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the second part, so that the actual game situation is more than the game situation suggested by the production means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous for the person. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting an unselected song can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a song but as an act of confirming whether or not the game situation is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F7]
When the tentatively selected music is the selected music, the first part of the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a music start part, and the second part of the tentatively selected music or the selected music is a chorus part. The gaming machine according to Appendix F6, characterized in that it is present.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F7, the first part is the music start part, while the second part is the chorus part clearly different from the first part, so that the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the second part. When it is output from the part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F8]
When the selected music is the selected music, the first portion of the selected music is a continuation portion of the provisionally selected music output from the voice output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to Appendix F6, wherein the second portion of the selected musical piece is a chorus portion or a musical composition start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F8, the selected music is a continuation part of the selected music, while the second part is a chorus part or a music starting part that is clearly different from the first part. When it is output from the second part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F9]
The effect executing means (51) is an initial tentative selection in which the tentatively selected music is first displayed as the tentatively selected music image (832) when the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341). Any of the supplementary notes F1 to F8, characterized in that the voice output means (26) outputs the tentatively selected tune from the second portion on condition that the tentatively selected musical piece is the initial tentatively selected musical piece for the music image (832). The game machine described in.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F9, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the second part when the music selection image is displayed on the image display means even if the player does not perform any operation on the operating means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player who does not tentatively select or select the music that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the directing means.

[Appendix F10]
The special gaming state includes a third special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and a fourth special gaming state (16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) in which the game time is longer than the third special gaming state. Including
The effect executing means (51) is
In the third special gaming state, the tentatively selected music or the selected music is output by the voice output means (26) from the first portion.
In the fourth special gaming state, the tentatively selected music is provided on condition that a suggestive effect suggesting that the third special gaming state is being executed is executed as an effect to be executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.). Alternatively, the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, wherein the selected music is output by the voice output means (26) from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix F10, the provisional selected music or the selected music is the second part on condition that the suggestion effect suggesting that the third special gaming state is executed is executed in the fourth special gaming state. Is output from. That is, the player is in the fourth special gaming state in which the current special gaming state has a longer gaming time than the third special gaming state by outputting the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second part. It is possible to know that the expected value of the game value that can be acquired is high. Therefore, the player can enjoy the act of temporarily selecting or selecting a music as an act of confirming whether or not the expected value of the game value that can be acquired is higher than that of the third special game state. it can.

[Appendix F11]
When the gaming state is the fourth special gaming state, the first part of the provisionally selected music or the selected music is a music start portion, and the second part of the provisionally selected music or the selected music is a chorus part. The gaming machine according to Appendix F10, characterized in that.

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F10 or Appendix F11, wherein when the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first portion of the provisionally selected music is a chorus portion.

[Appendix F13]
When the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first portion of the selected music is a continuation portion of the portion output from the voice output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to Appendix F10 or Appendix F11.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices F11 to 13, in the fourth special gaming state, the first part of the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the music start part, while the second part of the provisionally selected music or the selected music is. Since the chorus part is clearly different from the first part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort when the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the second part. Thereby, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F14]
Appendix F1 is characterized in that the effect executing means (51) determines whether or not to output the selected music from the second portion by a lottery performed triggered by the determination operation of the operating means by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F13.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F14, the actual gaming situation is more advantageous to the player than the gaming situation (for example, the normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) gaming state) suggested by the production means (for example, the probabilistic jackpot gaming state). ), The contradiction of the output start portion of the selected music can be generated by a simple control called a lottery by the determination operation for selecting the music.

[Appendix F15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F14, wherein the number of times of the lottery is provided with a predetermined upper limit for each execution of the special game.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix F15, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting a musical piece in one special game.

[Appendix F16]
The effect executing means (51) is
It is possible to select a musical piece to be output by the audio output means (26) within a predetermined selection validity period in the special gaming state.
It is planned to execute a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means after the selection validity period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F15, characterized in that the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix F16, when the tentative selection or selection of the music is performed within the selection validity period, the tentative selection music or the selected music is output from the second part, which is suggested by the directing means. It is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect is executed, which clearly indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation. Therefore, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix G1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operating means (21) operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341).
With
The effect executing means (51) is a music selection operation that suggests or clearly indicates the game state, provided that the player performs a determination operation on the operation means (21) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8, final effect 1 to 4) is executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1, a music selection operation effect suggesting or clearly indicating the game state is executed by a determination operation of the operating means by the player for selecting the music. Therefore, the player can enjoy the decision operation for selecting the music as an act of confirming the game state based on the music selection operation effect, not simply the act of selecting the music. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively select the music, and the player can be actively participated in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix G2]
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state) and a second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. ) Including
The music selection operation effect is an expectation degree suggestion effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8) that suggests the degree of expectation that the game state is the second game state, or the game state is the second game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, which is a definite effect (confirmed effects 1 to 4) that clearly indicates that.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G2, an expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation that the game state is the second special game state, or a definite effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the second special game state is performed. By setting to be executed, the expectation degree suggestion effect or the final effect is executed by the determination operation of the operation means by the player for selecting the music. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting a musical piece is not an act of simply selecting a musical piece, but an act of confirming the degree of expectation of being in the second special gaming state based on the expected degree suggestion effect or the final effect. Can be enjoyed as.
On the other hand, by setting not to execute the expectation suggestion effect or the final effect, the expectation suggestion effect or the final effect is not executed even if the determination operation is performed. Therefore, the special game can be enjoyed with the expectation that the game state is the second special game state without being overwhelmed by the content of the music selection operation effect.

[Appendix G3]
The effect executing means (51) is the condition that the selected music is an unselected music other than the selected music that has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, wherein the effect means (26, 341, etc.) is made to perform a music selection operation effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8, final effect 1 to 4).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, the music selection operation effect is executed on the condition that the unselected music is selected. Therefore, the player who wishes to execute the music selection operation effect is not positively performed. You can select a selected song. This makes it possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix G4]
The effect executing means (51) is the effect means (26) on condition that when a music is selected from the music selection image, the continuous hit operation or the long press operation is performed on the operation means (21). , 341, etc.) according to any one of the appendices G1 to G3, wherein the music selection operation effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G4, when selecting a musical piece, the player performs a continuous hit operation or a long press operation on the operating means, so that the gaming state is expected to be the second special gaming state. Music selection operation effects such as expectation suggestion effects that suggest the above are executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a musical piece is not limited to simply selecting a musical piece, but the degree of expectation of being in the second special gaming state based on the song selection operation effect such as the expected degree suggestion effect by performing a continuous hit operation or a long press operation. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the music.

[Appendix G5]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20).
The effect executing means (51) is
As the operation means (20, 21) to be operated by the player to select a music from the music selection image (83), the instruction image (84) instructing the first operation means (21) is the music selection image. It is displayed on the image display means (341) together with (83).
The music selection operation effect is executed on the effect means on the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G3.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G5, it is expected that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by performing the determination operation on the operating means different from the operating means instructed to select the music. Music selection operation effects such as expectation suggestion effects that suggest degrees are executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a musical piece is not limited to simply selecting a musical piece, but is a second special gaming state based on a song selection operation effect such as an expectation degree suggestion effect by performing an operation on an operation means different from the instructed operation means. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm the degree of expectation of things. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the music.

[Appendix G6]
The effect executing means (51) performs the music selection operation effect (suggestion effect 1 to) when the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined selection valid period in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G5, wherein the suggestion effect 8 and the final effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G6, since the decision operation for the selection of the music is performed in the predetermined period, the music selection operation production such as the expectation suggestion production is executed, so that the selected music is not sufficiently listened to and the music is selected. It is possible to prevent the selection of music from being unnecessarily repeated in order to confirm whether or not the operation effect is executed.

[Appendix G7]
The effect executing means (51) performs the song selection operation effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8) when the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. , The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G6, characterized in that the finalizing effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G7, since the music selection operation effect is executed when the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the selected music is not sufficiently listened to. It is possible to prevent the selection of music from being unnecessarily repeated in order to confirm whether or not the selection operation effect is executed.

[Appendix G8]
The operating means (21) is operated by the player when making settings related to the effect in the special gaming state.
Further provided with an effect execution setting means (51) for setting an effect execution setting for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the music selection operation effect.
The effect execution setting means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to the effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. , 99)
The effect execution setting means (51) is an operation in which the player performs the effect execution setting by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89,99). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note G1 to Supplementary note G7, characterized in that the effect execution setting for the song selection operation effect is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G8, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection operation effect, so that the music selection operation effect can be executed according to the preference of the player. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a form that suits him / herself.

[Appendix G9]
Further provided with an effect execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information related to the effect execution setting history for the effect execution setting.
The effect execution setting storage means (51) serves as the effect execution setting screen (89,99) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. The screen shifts to the effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying the setting history image (891) corresponding to the effect execution setting history information stored in (512).
The effect execution setting means (51) is a setting operation in which the player performs the effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history image (891) when the display screen is the effect execution setting history screen (89). The gaming machine according to Appendix G8, characterized in that, when the above is performed, the effect execution setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix G9, when the display screen in the image display means is the effect execution setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation for the operation means to produce the same content as the past effect execution settings. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix G10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G9, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image showing a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). ..

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix G10, the player can distinguish between the effect execution setting history of the player who has played the game before and his own effect execution setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in the own effect execution setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform the desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix H1]
A main control means (41) that determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
A game execution means (37) that executes a game according to the determination result of the main control means (41), and
A holding means (41) that holds the right to execute a game by the game executing means (37) up to a predetermined upper limit, and
A hold storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold game held by the hold means (41), and a hold storage means (412).
An image display means (341) in which an image effect is executed, and an effect means (26, 341, etc.) including an audio output means (26) in which a music output effect is executed.
A music selection image (83) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and is based on the music selection image (83). The effect executing means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26), and
An operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music from the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341), and
With
The effect executing means (51) includes a determination result for the reserved game stored in the reserved storage means (412) that shifts the game state to the special game state after the reserved game is executed. In that case, after the execution of the reserved game in the determination result for the reserved game stored in the reserved storage means (412) on condition that the determination operation for the operating means (21) is performed by the player. It is characterized in that the effect means (26, 341, etc.) executes a special effect (fixed effect 2 and final effect 4) that suggests or clearly indicates that the game state is shifted to the special game state. Amusement machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, a so-called reserved consecutive villa is performed in which the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state after the execution of the reserved game by the determination operation of the operating means by the player for selecting the music. The special effects shown can be performed. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting a song can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a song, but as an act of confirming whether or not the reserved villa is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the music.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix H2]
The effect executing means (51) is the effect means (26) on condition that when a music is selected from the music selection image, the continuous hit operation or the long press operation is performed on the operation means (21). , 341, etc.) to execute the special effect (fixed effect 2 and final effect 4), according to Appendix H1.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H2, when a musical piece is selected, the player performs a continuous striking operation or a long press operation on the operating means, so that the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state after the reserved game is executed. A special effect can be performed to indicate that a so-called reserved villa will be held. Therefore, the act of selecting a musical piece is not limited to simply selecting a musical piece, but can also be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the reserved villa is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the music.

[Appendix H3]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20).
The effect executing means (51) is
As the operation means (20, 21) to be operated by the player to select a music from the music selection image (83), the instruction image (84) instructing the first operation means (21) is the music selection image. It is displayed on the image display means (341) together with (83).
The music selection operation effect is executed on the effect means on the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84). The gaming machine according to Appendix H1 or Appendix H2, which is characterized in that

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H3, when a determination operation is performed on an operating means different from the operating means instructed to select a musical piece, the gaming state is changed to the special after the execution of the reserved game. A special effect indicating that a so-called reserved villa is performed, which shifts to a game state, can be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a musical piece is not limited to simply selecting a musical piece, but can also be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the reserved villa is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the music. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and the interest of the special game to improve the player's motivation to play.

[Appendix H4]
The effect executing means (51) causes the effect means (26, 341, etc.) to execute the special effect (fixed effect 2 and final effect 4) on the condition that the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H3.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H4, the special effect is executed on the condition that the unselected music is selected. Therefore, the unselected music is positively given to the player who wants to execute the special effect. Can be selected. This makes it possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix H5]
The effect executing means (51) performs the special effect on the effect means (51) on the condition that the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined period in the special gaming state. 26, 341, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H4, characterized in that it is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H5, since the special effect is executed on condition that the determination operation for the selection of the music is performed in the predetermined period, the special effect is executed without fully listening to the selected music. It is possible to prevent the selection of music from being repeated unnecessarily to confirm whether or not the music is selected.

[Appendix H6]
The effect executing means (51) performs the special effect on the effect means (26) on the condition that the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. , 341, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H5.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H6, the special effect is executed on condition that the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, so that the selected music is not sufficiently listened to. , It is possible to prevent the selection of music from being repeated unnecessarily to confirm whether or not the special effect is executed.

[Appendix H7]
The operating means (21) is operated by the player when making settings related to the effect in the special gaming state.
Further provided with an effect execution setting means (51) for setting an effect execution setting for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the special effect.
The effect execution setting means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to the effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. , 99)
The effect execution setting means (51) is an operation in which the player performs the effect execution setting by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89,99). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H6, characterized in that the effect execution setting for the special effect is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H7, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the special effect, so that the special effect can be executed according to the preference of the player. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a form that suits him / herself.

[Appendix H8]
Further provided with an effect execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding the setting history for the effect execution setting.
The effect execution setting storage means (51) serves as the effect execution setting screen (89,99) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. Move to the effect execution setting history screen (89) that displays the setting history image (891) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512).
The effect execution setting means (51) is a setting operation in which the player performs the effect execution setting based on the setting history image (891) when the display screen shifts to the effect execution setting history screen (89). The gaming machine according to Appendix H7, characterized in that, when made, the effect execution setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H8, when the display screen in the image display means is the effect execution setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation for the operation means to produce the same contents as the past effect execution settings. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H8, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image showing a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). ..

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix H9, by referring to the set time, the player can distinguish between, for example, the effect execution setting history of the player who has played the game before and his own effect execution setting history. In addition, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in the own effect execution setting history, it becomes easy to make a prospect when selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform the desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations for the operation means.

10: Game machine 20: Operation button 20a: Operation switch 21: Selection decision unit 21A: Selection button 211: Up selection button 212: Down selection button 213: Left selection button 214: Right selection buttons 211a to 211d: Selection operation switch 21B: Enter button 21Ba: Enter operation switch 26: Speaker 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display unit 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
83: Music selection image 831: Selected music image 832: Temporary music image 833: Unselected music image 834: Unselected music image

Claims (1)

A main control means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
An image display means for executing an effect by an image, an effect means including an audio output means for executing an effect for outputting a musical piece, and an effect means.
A music selection image for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the voice output means from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means, and the music selected by the player based on the music selection image is output as the voice. The production execution means to output to the means and
An operation means operated by the player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means based on the music selection image displayed by the image display means.
With
The effect executing means uses the effect of selecting a song to suggest or clearly indicate the game state, provided that the player performs a determination operation on the operation means when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by being executed.